Table of Contents
- NWA1000 Series
- Standalone Configuration
- Standalone Mode
- The Web Configurator
- Setup Wizard
- Dashboard
- Monitor
- Network
- Wireless
- User
- AP Profile
- WDS Profile
- Certificates
- System
- Log and Report
- File Manager
- Diagnostics
- LEDs
- Antenna Switch
- Reboot
- Shutdown
- Local Management in Cloud Mode
Zyxel NWA1123-ACHD-EU010 User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for NWA1123-ACHD-EU010 by Zyxel which is a product in the Wireless Access Points category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Default Login Details
User’s Guide
NWA1000 Series
802.11 a/b/g/n/ac Hybrid Access Points
Copyright © 2019 Zyxel Communications Corporation
LAN IP Address http://192.168.1.2
OR
DHCP-assigned
User Name admin
Password 1234
Version 5.46 Edition 1, 04/2019
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
2
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
This is a User’s Guide for a series of products. Not all products support all firmware features. Screenshots
and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product
firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information
in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
•Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the NWA1000 Series and access the Web Configurator.
•CLI Reference Guide
The CLI Reference Guide explains how to use the Command-Line Interface (CLI) and CLI commands
to configure the NWA1000 Series.
Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the NWA1000 Series.
• Web Configurator Online Help
Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary information.
• Nebula Control Center User’s Guide
This User’s Guide shows how to manage the NWA1000 Series remotely. Most features of these devices
can be managed through Nebula Control Center.
•More Information
Go to https://businessforum.zyxel.com for product discussions.
Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the NWA1000 Series.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
3
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this guide.
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to
configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• All models in this series may be referred to as the “NWA1000 Series” in this guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Configuration >
Network > IP Setting means you first click Configuration in the navigation panel, then the Network sub
menu and finally the IP Setting tab to get to that screen.
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this guide may use the following generic icons. The NWA1000 Series icon is not an exact
representation of your device.
NWA1000 Series Router Switch Internet
Server Desktop Laptop
Contents Overview
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
4
Contents Overview
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 12
Management Modes ........................................................................................................................... 16
Hardware ............................................................................................................................................... 19
Standalone Configuration ................................................................................................................30
Standalone Mode ................................................................................................................................ 31
The Web Configurator ......................................................................................................................... 34
Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................................................... 46
Dashboard ............................................................................................................................................ 52
Monitor ................................................................................................................................................... 58
Network ................................................................................................................................................. 72
Wireless ................................................................................................................................................... 78
User ......................................................................................................................................................... 91
AP Profile ................................................................................................................................................ 98
WDS Profile ........................................................................................................................................... 117
Certificates .......................................................................................................................................... 119
System .................................................................................................................................................. 135
Log and Report ................................................................................................................................... 158
File Manager ....................................................................................................................................... 170
Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................................... 181
LEDs ...................................................................................................................................................... 183
Antenna Switch .................................................................................................................................. 186
Reboot ................................................................................................................................................. 188
Shutdown ............................................................................................................................................. 189
Local Management in Cloud Mode .............................................................................................190
Cloud Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 191
The Web Configurator ....................................................................................................................... 193
Dashboard .......................................................................................................................................... 197
Network ............................................................................................................................................... 199
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 203
Table of Contents
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
5
Table of Contents
Document Conventions ....... .... ...................... ... .... .... ...................... ... .... .... ...................... .... ... ............3
Contents Overview .............................................................................................................................4
Table of Contents.................................................................................................................................5
Chapter 1
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................12
1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 12
1.2 Applications .................................................................................................................................... 13
1.2.1 MBSSID .................................................................................................................................... 13
1.2.2 Dual-Radio ............................................................................................................................. 14
Chapter 2
Management Modes.........................................................................................................................16
2.1 Management Mode ...................................................................................................................... 16
2.1.1 Mode Changing ................................................................................................................... 16
2.2 Standalone AP Roles ...................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.1 Root AP ................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.2 Repeater ................................................................................................................................ 18
Chapter 3
Hardware............................................................................................................................................19
3.1 Standalone Mode LEDs .................................................................................................................. 19
3.1.1 NWA1123-AC PRO ................................................................................................................ 19
3.1.2 NWA1123-ACv2 ..................................................................................................................... 21
3.1.3 NWA1123-AC HD ................................................................................................................... 21
3.1.4 NWA1302-AC ........................................................................................................................ 23
3.2 Cloud Mode LEDs ........................................................................................................................... 24
3.2.1 NWA1123-AC PRO ................................................................................................................ 24
3.2.2 NWA1123-ACv2 ..................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.3 NWA1123-AC HD ................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.4 NWA1302-AC ......................................................................................................................... 28
Part I: Standalone Configuration...................................................................30
Chapter 4
Standalone Mode..............................................................................................................................31
Table of Contents
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
6
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 31
4.2 Ways to Manage the NWA1000 Series ......................................................................................... 31
4.3 Good Habits for Managing the NWA1000 Series ........................................................................ 32
4.4 Starting and Stopping the NWA1000 Series ................................................................................. 32
Chapter 5
The Web Configurator........................................................................................................... .............34
5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 34
5.2 Accessing the Web Configurator ................................................................................................. 34
5.3 Navigating the Web Configurator ............................................................................................... 36
5.3.1 Title Bar ................................................................................................................................... 37
5.3.2 Navigation Panel .................................................................................................................. 40
5.3.3 Warning Messages ................................................................................................................ 43
5.3.4 Tables and Lists ...................................................................................................................... 43
Chapter 6
Setup Wizard.......................................................................................................................................46
6.1 Accessing the Wizard ..................................................................................................................... 46
6.2 Using the Wizard ............................................................................................................................. 46
6.2.1 Step 1 Time Settings .............................................................................................................. 46
6.2.2 Step 2 Password and Uplink Connection ........................................................................... 47
6.2.3 Step 3 Radio ......................................................................................................................... 48
6.2.4 Step 4 SSID ............................................................................................................................. 49
6.2.5 Summary ............................................................................................................................... 51
Chapter 7
Dashboard..........................................................................................................................................52
7.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 52
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 52
7.2 Dashboard ...................................................................................................................................... 52
7.2.1 CPU Usage ............................................................................................................................. 55
7.2.2 Memory Usage ...................................................................................................................... 56
Chapter 8
Monitor................................................................................................................................................58
8.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 58
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 58
8.2 What You Need to Know ............................................................................................................... 58
8.3 Network Status ................................................................................................................................ 59
8.3.1 Port Statistics Graph .............................................................................................................. 61
8.4 Radio List ......................................................................................................................................... 62
8.4.1 AP Mode Radio Information ................................................................................................63
8.5 Station List ....................................................................................................................................... 65
Table of Contents
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
7
8.6 WDS Link Info ................................................................................................................................... 66
8.7 Detected Device ........................................................................................................................... 67
8.8 View Log .......................................................................................................................................... 69
Chapter 9
Network...............................................................................................................................................72
9.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 72
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 72
9.2 IP Setting ......................................................................................................................................... 72
9.3 VLAN ................................................................................................................................................ 74
9.4 NCC Discovery ................................................................................................................................ 77
Chapter 10
Wireless ...............................................................................................................................................78
10.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 78
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..................................................................................... 78
10.1.2 What You Need to Know ...................................................................................................79
10.2 AP Management .......................................................................................................................... 79
10.3 Rogue AP ....................................................................................................................................... 82
10.3.1 Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly List .............................................................................................. 84
10.4 Load Balancing ............................................................................................................................ 85
10.4.1 Disassociating and Delaying Connections ...................................................................... 86
10.5 DCS ................................................................................................................................................ 87
10.6 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................... 88
Chapter 11
User......................................................................................................................................................91
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 91
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..................................................................................... 91
11.1.2 What You Need To Know ...................................................................................................91
11.2 User Summary ................................................................................................................................ 92
11.2.1 Add/Edit User ....................................................................................................................... 92
11.3 Setting ........................................................................................................................................... 94
11.3.1 Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings ........................................................................ 96
Chapter 12
AP Profile.............................................................................................................................................98
12.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 98
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..................................................................................... 98
12.1.2 What You Need To Know ...................................................................................................98
12.2 Radio .............................................................................................................................................. 99
12.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile ...................................................................................................... 100
12.3 SSID .............................................................................................................................................. 105
Table of Contents
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
8
12.3.1 SSID List ............................................................................................................................... 105
12.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile ......................................................................................................... 106
12.4 Security List .................................................................................................................................. 109
12.4.1 Add/Edit Security Profile ................................................................................................... 109
12.5 MAC Filter List .............................................................................................................................. 113
12.5.1 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile ............................................................................................... 113
12.6 Layer-2 Isolation List .................................................................................................................... 114
12.6.1 Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile .................................................................................... 116
Chapter 13
WDS Profile........................................................................................................................................117
13.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 117
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 117
13.2 WDS Profile ................................................................................................................................... 117
13.2.1 Add/Edit WDS Profile ........................................................................................................ 118
Chapter 14
Certificates .......................................................................................................................................119
14.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 119
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 119
14.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 119
14.1.3 Verifying a Certificate ...................................................................................................... 121
14.2 My Certificates ........................................................................................................................... 122
14.2.1 Add My Certificates .......................................................................................................... 123
14.2.2 Edit My Certificates ........................................................................................................... 125
14.2.3 Import Certificates ........................................................................................................... 128
14.3 Trusted Certificates ..................................................................................................................... 129
14.3.1 Edit Trusted Certificates .................................................................................................... 130
14.3.2 Import Trusted Certificates ............................................................................................... 133
14.4 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 134
Chapter 15
System...............................................................................................................................................135
15.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 135
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 135
15.2 Host Name ................................................................................................................................... 135
15.3 Date and Time ........................................................................................................................... 136
15.3.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List ..................................................................................... 139
15.3.2 Time Server Synchronization ............................................................................................ 139
15.4 WWW Overview .......................................................................................................................... 140
15.4.1 Service Access Limitations ............................................................................................... 140
15.4.2 System Timeout .................................................................................................................. 140
15.4.3 HTTPS ................................................................................................................................... 141
Table of Contents
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
9
15.4.4 Configuring WWW Service Control ................................................................................. 141
15.4.5 HTTPS Example ................................................................................................................... 142
15.5 SSH ............................................................................................................................................... 148
15.5.1 How SSH Works .................................................................................................................. 149
15.5.2 SSH Implementation on the NWA1000 Series ................................................................. 150
15.5.3 Requirements for Using SSH ..............................................................................................150
15.5.4 Configuring SSH ................................................................................................................. 150
15.5.5 Examples of Secure Telnet Using SSH .............................................................................. 151
15.6 Telnet ........................................................................................................................................... 152
15.7 FTP ................................................................................................................................................ 153
15.8 SNMP ........................................................................................................................................... 154
15.8.1 Supported MIBs ................................................................................................................. 155
15.8.2 SNMP Traps ......................................................................................................................... 155
15.8.3 Configuring SNMP ............................................................................................................. 155
15.8.4 Adding or Editing an SNMPv3 User Profile ...................................................................... 156
Chapter 16
Log and Report... .... ...................... .... .... ...................... ... .... .... ...................... ... .... ..............................158
16.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 158
16.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter .................................................................................. 158
16.2 Email Daily Report ....................................................................................................................... 158
16.3 Log Setting .................................................................................................................................. 160
16.3.1 Log Setting Screen ............................................................................................................ 161
16.3.2 Edit System Log Settings .................................................................................................. 162
16.3.3 Edit Remote Server ........................................................................................................... 166
16.3.4 Active Log Summary ....................................................................................................... 167
Chapter 17
File Manager ....................................................................................................................................170
17.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 170
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 170
17.1.2 What you Need to Know .................................................................................................. 170
17.2 Configuration File ....................................................................................................................... 171
17.2.1 Example of Configuration File Download Using FTP ...................................................... 175
17.3 Firmware Package .................................................................................................................... 176
17.3.1 Example of Firmware Upload Using FTP .......................................................................... 177
17.4 Shell Script ................................................................................................................................... 178
Chapter 18
Diagnostics.......................................................................................................................................181
18.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 181
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 181
18.2 Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................. 181
Table of Contents
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
10
Chapter 19
LEDs ...................................................................................................................................................183
19.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 183
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 183
19.2 Suppression Screen ................................................................................................................... 183
19.3 Locator Screen .......................................................................................................................... 184
Chapter 20
Antenna Switch................................................................................................................................186
20.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 186
20.1.1 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 186
20.2 Antenna Switch Screen ............................................................................................................. 186
Chapter 21
Reboot...............................................................................................................................................188
21.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 188
21.1.1 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 188
21.2 Reboot ......................................................................................................................................... 188
Chapter 22
Shutdown..........................................................................................................................................189
22.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 189
22.1.1 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 189
22.2 Shutdown ..................................................................................................................................... 189
Part II: Local Management in Cloud Mode................................................190
Chapter 23
Cloud Mode ...................... .... .... ... ...................... .... .... ... .... ...................... .... ... .... ..............................191
23.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 191
23.2 Ways to Manage the NWA1000 Series ..................................................................................... 191
23.3 Good Habits for Managing the NWA1000 Series .................................................................... 192
Chapter 24
The Web Configurator........................................................................................................... ...........193
24.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 193
24.2 Access .......................................................................................................................................... 193
24.3 Navigating the Web Configurator ...........................................................................................194
24.3.1 Title Bar ............................................................................................................................... 194
24.3.2 Navigation Panel .............................................................................................................. 195
24.3.3 Warning Messages ............................................................................................................ 196
Table of Contents
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
11
Chapter 25
Dashboard........................................................................................................................................197
25.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 197
25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 197
25.2 Dashboard .................................................................................................................................. 197
Chapter 26
Network.............................................................................................................................................199
26.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 199
26.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 199
26.2 IP Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 199
26.3 VLAN ............................................................................................................................................ 201
Chapter 27
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................203
27.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 203
27.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED ................................................................................ 203
27.3 NWA1000 Series Access and Login .......................................................................................... 204
27.4 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................... 206
27.5 Wireless Connections ................................................................................................................. 207
27.6 Resetting the NWA1000 Series ................................................................................................... 210
27.7 Getting More Troubleshooting Help .........................................................................................211
Appendix A Importing Certificates ............................................................................................... 212
Appendix B IPv6............................................................................................................................... 235
Appendix C Customer Support ..................................................................................................... 243
Appendix D Legal Information ...................................................................................................... 249
Index .................................................................................................................................................258
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
12
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
1.1 Overview
This User’s Guide covers the following models: NWA1123-ACv2, NWA1123-AC PRO, NWA1123-AC HD,
and NWA1302-AC. Your NWA1000 Series is a wireless Access Point (AP). The NWA1000 Series extends the
range of your existing wired network without additional wiring, providing easy network access to mobile
users. You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac compatible devices. The
NWA1000 Series is able to function both 2.4GHz and 5GHz networks at the same time.
You can set the NWA1000 Series to operate in either standalone or cloud mode. Cloud mode means
the device is managed over the Internet using Nebula Control Center (NCC), as discussed in Chapter 23
on page 191. When the NWA1000 Series is in standalone mode, it can serve as a:
Table 1 NWA1000 Series Comparison Table
FEATURES NWA1123-ACV2NWA1123-AC
PRO NWA1123-AC HD NWA1302-AC
Supported Wireless
Standards
IEEE 802.11a
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
IEEE 802.11ac
IEEE 802.11a
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
IEEE 802.11ac
IEEE 802.11a
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
IEEE 802.11ac
IEEE 802.11a
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
IEEE 802.11ac
Supported Frequency
Bands
2.4 GHz
5 GHz 2.4 GHz
5 GHz 2.4 GHz
5 GHz 2.4 GHz
5 GHz
Available Security Modes None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
Number of SSID Profiles 64 64 64 64
Number of Wireless Radios 2 2 2 2
Rogue APs Detection Yes Yes Yes Yes
WDS (Wireless Distribution
System) - Root AP &
Repeater Modes
Yes Yes No No
Layer-2 Isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes
Power Detection No No Yes Yes
Internal Antennas Yes Yes Yes Yes
Antenna Switch No Yes No No
LED Locator Yes Yes Yes Yes
LED Suppression Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cloud Mode Yes Yes Yes Yes
Maximum number of log
messages 512 event logs and 1024 debug logs
Chapter 1 Introduction
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
13
•regular AP
• root AP
• wireless repeater
The root AP or wireless repeaters establish wireless links with other APs in a Wireless Distribution System
(WDS). A WDS is a wireless connection between two or more APs.
Your NWA1000 Series’s business-class reliability, SMB features, and centralized wireless management
make it ideally suited for advanced service delivery in mission-critical networks. It uses Multiple BSSID and
VLAN to provide simultaneous independent virtual APs. Additionally, innovations in roaming technology
and QoS features eliminate voice call disruptions.
The NWA1000 Series controls network access with Media Access Control (MAC) address filtering, and
rogue Access Point (AP) detection. It also provides a high level of network traffic security, supporting IEEE
802.1x, Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption.
Your NWA1000 Series is easy to install, configure and use. The embedded Web-based configurator
enables simple, straightforward management and maintenance. See the Quick Start Guide for making
hardware connections.
1.2 Applications
This section shows some examples of using the NWA1000 Series in various network environments.
1.2.1 MBSSID
A Basic Service Set (BSS) is the set of devices forming a single wireless network (usually an access point
and one or more wireless clients). The Service Set IDentifier (SSID) is the name of a BSS. In Multiple BSS
(MBSSID) mode, the NWA1000 Series provides multiple virtual APs, each forming its own BSS and using its
own individual SSID profile.
You can configure multiple SSID profiles, and have all of them active at any one time.
You can assign different wireless and security settings to each SSID profile. This allows you to
compartmentalize groups of users, set varying access privileges, and prioritize network traffic to and
from certain BSSs.
To the wireless clients in the network, each SSID appears to be a different access point. As in any wireless
network, clients can associate only with the SSIDs for which they have the correct security settings.
For example, you might want to set up a wireless network in your office where Internet telephony (VoIP)
users have priority. You also want a regular wireless network for standard users, as well as a ‘guest’
wireless network for visitors. In the following figure, VoIP_SSID users have QoS priority, SSID01 is the wireless
network for standard users, and Guest_SSID is the wireless network for guest users. In this example, the
guest user is forbidden access to the wired Land Area Network (LAN) behind the AP and can access
only the Internet.
Chapter 1 Introduction
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
14
Figure 1 Multiple BSSs
1.2.2 Dual-Radio
Some of the NWA1000 Series models are equipped with dual wireless radios. This means you can
configure two different wireless networks to operate simultaneously.
Note: A different channel should be configured for each WLAN interface to reduce the
effects of radio interference.
You could use the 2.4 GHz band for regular Internet surfing and downloading while using the 5 GHz
band for time sensitive traffic like high-definition video, music, and gaming.
Chapter 1 Introduction
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
15
Figure 2 Dual-Radio Application
Chapter 2 Management Modes
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
16
CHAPTER 2
Management Modes
2.1 Management Mode
The NWA1000 Series is a hybrid access point, which means it can work either in standalone mode or in
Nebula Cloud Management Mode (cloud mode).
Standalone
By default, the NWA1000 Series serves as a normal AP and is to be configured using its built-in web
configurator or CLI (Command Line Interface), See Chapter 4 on page 31 for detailed information
about the web configurator screens.
Nebula Cloud Management
In this mode, you can manage and monitor the NWA1000 Series through the Zyxel Nebula cloud-based
network management system. See the NCC (Nebula Control Center) User’s Guide for how to configure
Nebula managed devices. See Chapter 23 on page 191 if you want to change the NWA1000 Series’s
VLAN setting or manually set its IP address.
2.1.1 Mode Changing
This section describes how to change the NWA1000 Series’s management mode.
From Standalone to Cloud
To manage your NWA1000 Series via the Zyxel NCC, connect the NWA1000 Series to the Internet and
register it to a site and organization in the NCC (http://nebula.zyxel.com) first using its serial number and
MAC address or its QR code. The serial number, MAC address and QR code can be found in the web
configurator dashboard or the label on the device. See the corresponding Quick Start Guide for how to
do hardware connections and device registration.
Note: The NWA1000 Series automatically goes into cloud mode after it can access the NCC
through the specified proxy server (if any) and is successfully registered in the NCC. Its
login password and wireless settings are then overwritten with what you have
configured in the NCC.
From Cloud to Standalone
To return to the default standalone mode, just click Unregister to remove the NWA1000 Series from the
organization/site in the NCC. The NWA1000 Series will reboot and restore the factory default settings.
Chapter 2 Management Modes
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
17
2.2 Standalone AP Roles
Depending on your network setup, your NWA1000 Series in standalone mode can adopt the following
roles.
2.2.1 Root AP
The NWA1000 Series (Z) can act as the root AP in a wireless network and also allow repeaters (X and Y)
to extend the range of its wireless network at the same time. In the figure below, both clients A, B and C
can access the wired network through the root AP.
Figure 3 Root AP Application
On the NWA1000 Series in Root AP mode, you can have multiple SSIDs active for regular wireless
connections and one SSID for the connection with a repeater (repeater SSID). Wireless clients can use
either SSID to associate with the NWA1000 Series in Root AP mode. A repeater must use the repeater
SSID to connect to the NWA1000 Series in Root AP mode.
When the NWA1000 Series is in Root AP mode, repeater security between the NWA1000 Series and other
repeater is independent of the security between the wireless clients and the AP or repeater. When
repeater security is enabled, both APs and repeaters must use the same pre-shared key. See Section
10.2 on page 79 and Section 13.2 on page 117 for more details.
Unless specified, the term “security settings” refers to the traffic between the wireless clients and the AP.
At the time of writing, repeater security is compatible with the NWA1000 Series only.
Chapter 2 Management Modes
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
18
2.2.2 Repeater
The NWA1000 Series can act as a wireless network repeater to extend a root AP’s wireless network
range, and also establish wireless connections with wireless clients.
Using Repeater mode, your NWA1000 Series can extend the range of the WLAN. In the figure below, the
NWA1000 Series in Repeater mode (Z) has a wireless connection to the NWA1000 Series in Root AP mode
(X) which is connected to a wired network and also has a wireless connection to another NWA1000
Series in Repeater mode (Y) at the same time. Z and Y act as repeaters that forward traffic between
associated wireless clients and the wired LAN. Clients A and B access the AP and the wired network
behind the AP through repeaters Z and Y.
Figure 4 Repeater Application
When the NWA1000 Series is in Repeater mode, repeater security between the NWA1000 Series and
other repeater is independent of the security between the wireless clients and the AP or repeater. When
repeater security is enabled, both APs and repeaters must use the same pre-shared key. See Section
10.2 on page 79 and Section 13.2 on page 117 for more details.
Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
At the time of writing, repeater security is compatible with the NWA1000 Series only.
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
19
CHAPTER 3
Hardware
See your Quick Start Guide for information on making hardware connections.
3.1 Standalone Mode LEDs
The LEDs of your NWA1000 Series can be controlled by using the Suppression feature such that the LEDs
stay lit (ON) or OFF after the device is ready.
Following are LED descriptions for the NWA1000 Series series models in standalone mode.
3.1.1 NWA1123-AC PRO
The LEDs will stay ON when the NWA1123-AC PRO is ready. You can change this setting in the
Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression screen.
Figure 5 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
20
The following table describes the LEDs.
Table 2 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR/SYS Red Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the
NWA1000 Series is booting up.
Green On
Green On The NWA1000 Series is ready for use.
Red On There is system error and the NWA1000 Series cannot
boot up, or the NWA1000 Series suffered a system failure.
Red Fast Blinking (On for 50
ms, Off for 50 ms)
The NWA1000 Series is doing firmware upgrade.
Red Slow Blinking (Blink for 3
times, Off for 3 sec)
The Uplink port is disconnected.
Green Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or
failed.
Management Green/
Amber
Off The NWA1000 Series is in standalone mode.
WLAN Green On The antenna switch is set to “Ceiling” for the radio.
The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.
Amber On The antenna switch is set to “Wall” for the radio.
The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.
Off The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.
WLAN Green On The antenna switch is set to “Ceiling” for the radio.
The 5 GHz WLAN is active.
Amber On The antenna switch is set to “Wall” for the radio.
The 5 GHz WLAN is active.
Off The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.
UPLINK Amber/
Green
On Amber - The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection.
Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection
(1000 Mbps).
Blinking The NWA1000 Series is sending/receiving data through
the port.
Off The port is not connected.
LAN Amber/
Green
On Amber - The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection.
Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection
(1000 Mbps).
Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port.
Off The LAN port is not connected.
Locator White Blinking The Locator is activated and will show the actual location
of the NWA1000 Series between several devices in the
network.
Off The Locator function is off.
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
21
3.1.2 NWA1123-ACv2
The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-ACv2.
Figure 6 NWA1123-ACv2 LED
The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1000 Series.
3.1.3 NWA1123-AC HD
The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC HD.
Table 3 NWA1123-ACv2 LED
COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Amber Blinks amber for 1
second and green for
1 second alternatively.
The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the NWA1000
Series is booting up.
Green
Green Steady On The NWA1000 Series is ready for use and its wireless interface is
activated.
Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or failed.
Red Steady On The NWA1000 Series failed to boot up or is experience system failure.
Fast Blinking (On for 50
ms, Off for 50 ms)
The NWA1000 Series is undergoing firmware upgrade.
Slow Blinking (Blink for
3 times, Off for 3 sec)
The Uplink port is disconnected.
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
22
Figure 7 NWA1123-AC HD LED
The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1000 Series.
Table 4 NWA1123-AC HD LED
COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Amber Blinks amber for 1 second
and green for 1 second
alternatively.
The NWA1000 Series is booting up.
Green
Green Slow Blinking (On for 1
second, Off for 1 second)
The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or fails,
the NWA1000 Series is using default wireless settings.
Green Steady On The NWA1000 Series is ready for use, the NWA1000 Series’s
wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are
connected to the NWA1000 Series when it receives power
using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus (full power mode).
Amber Steady On The NWA1000 Series is ready for use, the NWA1000 Series’s
wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are
connected to the NWA1000 Series when it receives power
using 802.3af PoE (limited power mode).
Bright Blue Steady On The NWA1000 Series’s wireless interface is activated, but there
are no wireless clients connected when it receives power
using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus (full power mode).
White Steady On The NWA1000 Series’s wireless interface is activated, but there
are no wireless clients connected when it receives power
using 802.3af PoE (limited power mode).
Blue Slow Blinking (Blink for 1
time, Off for 1 second)
The NWA1000 Series is performing a Channel Availability
Check (CAC) with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to
monitor a channel for radar signals.
Red On The NWA1000 Series failed to boot up or is experience system
failure.
Fast Blinking (On for 50
milliseconds, Off for 50
milliseconds)
The NWA1000 Series is undergoing firmware upgrade.
Slow Blinking (Blink for 3
times, Off for 3 seconds)
The Uplink port of the NWA1000 Series is disconnected.
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
23
3.1.4 NWA1302-AC
By default, the LEDs automatically turn on when the NWA1302-AC is ready. If the Suppression On option
is selected in the LEDs > Suppression screen (see Section 19.2 on page 183) to turn off the LEDs, you can
press the LED ON button for one second to turn on the LEDs again. The LEDs will blink and turn off after
two minutes.
Figure 8 NWA1302-AC LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs.
Table 5 NWA1302-AC LEDs
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR/SYS Red Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the
NWA1000 Series is booting up.
Green On
Green On The NWA1000 Series is ready for use.
Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or
failed.
Red On There is system error and the NWA1000 Series cannot
boot up, or the NWA1000 Series suffered a system failure.
Fast Blinking (On for 50
ms, Off for 50 ms)
The NWA1000 Series is doing firmware upgrade.
Slow Blinking (Blink for 3
times, Off for 3 sec)
The Uplink port is disconnected.
Management Green/
Amber
Off The NWA1000 Series is in standalone mode.
UPLINK Amber/
Green
On Amber - The port is operating as a 10/100-Mbps
connection.
Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection
(1000 Mbps).
Blinking The NWA1000 Series is sending/receiving data through
the port.
Off The port is not connected.
WLAN Green On The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.
Off The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
24
3.2 Cloud Mode LEDs
Following are LED descriptions for the NWA1000 Series series models in cloud mode.
3.2.1 NWA1123-AC PRO
The LEDs will stay ON when the NWA1123-AC PRO is ready. You can change this setting through the
NCC (Nebula Control Center).
Figure 9 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs
WLAN Green On The 5 GHz WLAN is active.
Off The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.
LAN Amber/
Green
On Amber - The port is operating as a 10/100-Mbps
connection.
Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection
(1000 Mbps).
Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port.
Off The LAN port is not connected.
Table 5 NWA1302-AC LEDs (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
25
The following table describes the LEDs.
Table 6 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR/SYS Red Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the
NWA1000 Series is booting up.
Green On
Green On The NWA1000 Series is ready for use.
Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or
failed.
Red On There is a system error and the NWA1000 Series cannot boot
up, or the NWA1000 Series suffered a system failure.
Fast Blinking (On for 50
ms, Off for 50 ms)
The NWA1000 Series is undergoing firmware upgrade.
Slow Blinking (Blink for 3
times, Off for 3 sec)
The Uplink port is disconnected.
Management Green On The NWA1000 Series is managed by the NCC.
Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The NWA1000 Series is connected to the NCC, but not
registered.
Amber Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The NWA1000 Series is searching for (discovering) the NCC.
WLAN Green On The antenna switch is set to “Ceiling” for the radio.
The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.
Amber On The antenna switch is set to “Wall” for the radio.
The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.
Off The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.
WLAN Green On The antenna switch is set to “Ceiling” for the radio.
The 5 GHz WLAN is active.
Amber On The antenna switch is set to “Wall” for the radio.
The 5 GHz WLAN is active.
Off The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.
UPLINK Amber/
Green
On Amber - The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection.
Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000
Mbps).
Blinking The NWA1000 Series is sending/receiving data through the
port.
Off The port is not connected.
LAN Amber/
Green
On Amber - The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection.
Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000
Mbps).
Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port.
Off The LAN port is not connected.
Locator White Blinking The Locator is activated and will show the actual location
of the NWA1000 Series between several devices in the
network.
Off The Locator function is off.
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
26
3.2.2 NWA1123-ACv2
The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-ACv2.
Figure 10 NWA1123-ACv2 LED
The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-ACv2.
3.2.3 NWA1123-AC HD
The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC HD.
Table 7 NWA1123-ACv2 LED
COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Amber Blinks amber for 1
second and green for
1 second alternatively.
The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the NWA1000
Series is booting up.
Green
Amber Blinks amber and
green alternatively 3
times and then turns
solid green for 3
seconds.
The NWA1000 Series is discovering the NCC.
Green
Green On The NWA1000 Series is ready for use and its wireless interface is
activated.
Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or failed, or
the NWA1000 Series is connected to the NCC, but not registered.
Red On The NWA1000 Series failed to boot up or is experience system failure.
Fast Blinking (On for 50
ms, Off for 50 ms)
The NWA1000 Series is undergoing firmware upgrade.
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
27
Figure 11 NWA1123-AC HD LED
The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC HD.
Table 8 NWA1123-AC HD LED
COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Amber Blinks amber for 1 second
and green for 1 second
alternatively.
The NWA1000 Series is booting up.
Green
Amber Blinks amber and green
alternatively 3 times and
then turns solid green for 3
seconds.
The NWA1000 Series is discovering the NCC.
Green
Green Slow Blinking (On for 1
second, Off for 1 second)
The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or fails,
the NWA1000 Series is in cloud mode but not registered with
the NCC.
Green Steady On The NWA1000 Series is ready for use, the NWA1000 Series’s
wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are
connected to the NWA1000 Series when it receives power
using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus (full power mode).
Amber Steady On The NWA1000 Series is ready for use, the NWA1000 Series’s
wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are
connected to the NWA1000 Series when it receives power
using 802.3af PoE (limited power mode).
Bright Blue Steady On The NWA1000 Series’s wireless interface is activated, but there
are no wireless clients connected when it receives power
using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus (full power mode).
White Steady On The NWA1000 Series’s wireless interface is activated, but there
are no wireless clients connected when it receives power
using 802.3af PoE (limited power mode).
Blue Slow Blinking (Blink for 1
time, Off for 1 second)
The NWA1000 Series is performing a Channel Availability
Check (CAC) with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to
monitor a channel for radar signals.
Red On The NWA1000 Series failed to boot up or is experience system
failure.
Fast Blinking (On for 50
milliseconds, Off for 50
milliseconds)
The NWA1000 Series is undergoing firmware upgrade.
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
28
3.2.4 NWA1302-AC
By default, the LEDs automatically turn on when the NWA1302-AC is ready. If the LEDs are turned off by
the NCC, you can press the LED ON button for one second to turn on the LEDs again. The LEDs will blink
and turn off after two minutes.
Figure 12 MWA1302-AC LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs.
Table 9 NWA1302-AC LEDs
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR/SYS Red Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The LED blinks orange and green alternatively when the
NWA1000 Series is booting up.
Green On
Green On The NWA1000 Series is ready for use.
Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The wireless module of the NWA1000 Series is disabled or
failed.
Red On There is a system error and the NWA1000 Series cannot
boot up, or the NWA1000 Series suffered a system failure.
Fast Blinking (On for 50
ms, Off for 50 ms)
The NWA1000 Series is doing firmware upgrade.
Slow Blinking (Blink for 3
times, Off for 3 sec)
The Uplink port is disconnected.
Management Green On The NWA1000 Series is managed by the NCC.
Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1 sec)
The NWA1000 Series is connected to the NCC, but not
registered.
Amber Slow Blinking (On for 1
sec, Off for 1sec)
The NWA1000 Series is searching for (discovering) the
NCC.
UPLINK Amber/
Green
On Amber - The port is operating as a 10/100-Mbps
connection.
Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection
(1000 Mbps).
Blinking The NWA1000 Series is sending/receiving data through
the port.
Off The port is not connected.
Chapter 3 Hardware
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
29
WLAN Green On The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.
Off The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.
WLAN Green On The 5 GHz WLAN is active.
Off The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.
LAN Amber/
Green
On Amber - The port is operating as a 10/100-Mbps
connection.
Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection
(1000 Mbps).
Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port.
Off The LAN port is not connected.
Table 9 NWA1302-AC LEDs (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
30
PART I
Standalone
Configuration
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
31
CHAPTER 4
Standalone Mode
4.1 Overview
The NWA1000 Series operates in standalone mode by default. Use the web configurator to manage and
configure it directly. As shown in the following figure, wireless clients can connect to the NWA1000 Series
(A) to access network resources.
4.2 Ways to Manage the NWA1000 Series
You can use the following ways to manage the NWA1000 Series.
Web Configurator
The Web Configurator allows easy NWA1000 Series setup and management using an Internet browser.
This User’s Guide provides information about the Web Configurator.
Command-Line Interface (CLI)
The CLI allows you to use text-based commands to configure the NWA1000 Series. You can access it
using remote management (for example, SSH or Telnet). See the Command Reference Guide for more
information.
Chapter 4 Standalone Mode
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
32
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
This protocol can be used for firmware upgrades and configuration backup and restore.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The NWA1000 Series can be monitored by an SNMP manager. See the SNMP chapter in this User’s
Guide.
4.3 Good Habits for Managing the NWA1000 Series
Do the following things regularly to make the NWA1000 Series more secure and to manage it more
effectively.
• Change the password often. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different
types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working
configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your
password, you will have to reset the NWA1000 Series to its factory default settings. If you backed up
an earlier configuration file, you won’t have to totally re-configure the NWA1000 Series; you can
simply restore your last configuration.
4.4 Starting and Stopping the NWA1000 Series
Here are some of the ways to start and stop the NWA1000 Series.
Always use Maintenance > Shutdown or the shutdown command
before you turn off the NWA1000 Series or remove the power. Not doing
so can cause the firmware to become corrupt.
Table 10 Starting and Stopping the NWA1000 Series
METHOD DESCRIPTION
Turning on the power A cold start occurs when you turn on the power to the NWA1000 Series. The NWA1000
Series powers up, checks the hardware, and starts the system processes.
Rebooting the
NWA1000 Series
A warm start (without powering down and powering up again) occurs when you use the
Reboot button in the Reboot screen or when you use the reboot command. The
NWA1000 Series writes all cached data to the local storage, stops the system processes,
and then does a warm start.
Using the RESET button If you press the RESET button on the back of the NWA1000 Series, the NWA1000 Series sets
the configuration to its default values and then reboots. See Section 27.6 on page 210 for
more information.
Chapter 4 Standalone Mode
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
33
The NWA1000 Series does not stop or start the system processes when you apply configuration files or run
shell scripts although you may temporarily lose access to network resources.
Clicking Maintenance
> Shutdown >
Shutdown or using the
shutdown command
Clicking Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown or using the shutdown command writes all
cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes. Wait for the device to
shut down and then manually turn off or remove the power. It does not turn off the
power.
Disconnecting the
power
Power off occurs when you turn off the power to the NWA1000 Series. The NWA1000 Series
simply turns off. It does not stop the system processes or write cached data to local
storage.
Table 10 Starting and Stopping the NWA1000 Series
METHOD DESCRIPTION
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
34
CHAPTER 5
The Web Configurator
5.1 Overview
The NWA1000 Series Web Configurator allows easy management using an Internet browser.
In order to use the Web Configurator, you must:
• Use Internet Explorer 10.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 36.0 and later versions, Safari 9.0 and later
versions, or Google Chrome 38.0 and later versions.
• Allow pop-up windows.
• Enable JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Enable Java permissions (enabled by default).
• Enable cookies.
The recommended screen resolution is 1024 x 768 pixels and higher.
5.2 Accessing the Web Configurator
1Make sure your NWA1000 Series is working in standalone mode (see Section 1.2.1 on page 13) and
hardware is properly connected. See the Quick Start Guide.
2If the NWA1000 Series and your computer are not connected to a DHCP server, make sure your
computer’s IP address is in the range between "192.168.1.3" and "192.168.1.254".
3Browse to the NWA1000 Series’s DHCP-assigned IP address or http://192.168.1.2. The Login screen
appears.
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
35
4Enter the user name (default: “admin”) and password (default: “1234”). Click Login.
Click the Visit button if you want to open the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC) login page in a new
tab or window. The NCC is a cloud-based network management system that allows you to remotely
manage and monitor the NWA1000 Series in cloud mode (see Section 1.2.1 on page 13).
5If you logged in using the default user name and password, the Update Admin Info screen appears.
Otherwise, the dashboard appears.
The Update Admin Info screen appears every time you log in using the default user name and default
password. If you change the password for the default user account, this screen does not appear
anymore.
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
36
6Each time you log into the web configurator, a Message center screen will pop up showing the QR
code of the NWA1000 Series. Use the Zyxel Nebula Mobile app to scan the QR code. The NWA1000
Series will be registered and assigned to an existing site/organization in the NCC automatically. Click OK
to close the screen.
5.3 Navigating the Web Configurator
The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Dashboard screen. This guide
uses the NWA1123-AC HD screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different models.
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
37
Figure 13 The Web Configurator’s Main Screen
The Web Configurator’s main screen is divided into these parts:
•A - Title Bar
•B - Navigation Panel
•C - Main Window
5.3.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides some useful links that always appear over the screens below, regardless of how
deep into the Web Configurator you navigate.
Figure 14 Title Bar
The icons provide the following functions.
A
C
B
Table 11 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Logout Click this to log out of the Web Configurator.
Wizard Click this to open the wizard. See Chapter 6 on page 46 for more information.
Help Click this to open the help page for the current screen.
About Click this to display basic information about the NWA1000 Series.
Site Map Click this to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens.
Object
Reference
Click this to open a screen where you can check which configuration items reference an
object.
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
38
About
Click About to display basic information about the NWA1000 Series.
Figure 15 About
The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen.
Site Map
Click Site MAP to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens. Click a screen’s link to go to
that screen.
CLI Click this to open a popup window that displays the CLI commands sent by the Web
Configurator.
nebula Click this to open the NCC web site login page in a new tab or window.
Table 12 About
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Boot Module This shows the version number of the software that handles the booting process of the
NWA1000 Series.
Current Version This shows the firmware version of the NWA1000 Series.
Released Date This shows the date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh:mm:ss) when the firmware is released.
OK Click this to close the screen.
Table 11 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
39
Figure 16 Site Map
Object Reference
Click Object Reference to open the Object Reference screen. Select the type of object and the
individual object and click Refresh to show which configuration settings reference the object.
Figure 17 Object Reference
The fields vary with the type of object. The following table describes labels that can appear in this
screen.
Table 13 Object References
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Object Name This identifies the object for which the configuration settings that use it are displayed. Click the
object’s name to display the object’s configuration screen in the main window.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Service This is the type of setting that references the selected object. Click a service’s name to display
the service’s configuration screen in the main window.
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
40
CLI Messages
Click CLI to look at the CLI commands sent by the Web Configurator. These commands appear in a
popup window, such as the following.
Figure 18 CLI Messages
Click Clear to remove the currently displayed information.
Note: See the Command Reference Guide for information about the commands.
5.3.2 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure NWA1000 Series features.
Click the arrow in the middle of the right edge of the navigation panel to hide the navigation panel
menus or drag it to resize them. The following sections introduce the NWA1000 Series’s navigation panel
menus and their screens.
Priority If it is applicable, this field lists the referencing configuration item’s position in its list, otherwise
N/A displays.
Name This field identifies the configuration item that references the object.
Description If the referencing configuration item has a description configured, it displays here.
Refresh Click this to update the information in this screen.
Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen.
Table 13 Object References (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
41
Figure 19 Navigation Panel
Dashboard
The dashboard displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, and
interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs.
For details on the Dashboard’s features, see Chapter 7 on page 52.
Monitor Menu
The monitor menu screens display status and statistics information.
Configuration Menu
Use the configuration menu screens to configure the NWA1000 Series’s features.
Table 14 Monitor Menu Screens Summary
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Network Status Network
Status
Display general LAN interface information and packet statistics.
Wireless
AP Information Radio List Display information about the radios of the connected APs.
Station Info Station List Display information about the connected stations.
WDS Link Info WDS Link Info Display statistics about the NWA1000 Series’s WDS (Wireless Disctribution
System) connections.
Detected Device Detected
Device
Display information about suspected rogue APs.
Log View Log Display log entries for the NWA1000 Series.
Table 15 Configuration Menu Screens Summary
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Network IP Setting Configure the IP address for the NWA1000 Series Ethernet interface.
VLAN Manage the Ethernet interface VLAN settings.
NCC Discovery Configures proxy server settings to access the NCC.
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
42
Maintenance Menu
Use the maintenance menu screens to manage configuration and firmware files, run diagnostics, and
reboot or shut down the NWA1000 Series.
Wireless
AP
Management WLAN Setting Manage the NWA1000 Series’s general wireless settings.
Rogue AP Rogue/Friendly AP
List
Configure how the NWA1000 Series monitors for rogue APs.
Load Balancing Load Balancing Configure load balancing for traffic moving to and from wireless
clients.
DCS DCS Configure dynamic wireless channel selection.
Object
User User Create and manage users.
Setting Manage default settings for all users, general settings for user sessions,
and rules to force user authentication.
AP Profile Radio Create and manage wireless radio settings files that can be
associated with different APs.
SSID Create and manage wireless SSID, security, MAC filtering, and layer-2
isolation files that can be associated with different APs.
WDS Profile WDS Create and manage WDS profiles that can be used to connect to
different APs in WDS.
Certificate My Certificates Create and manage th e NWA1000 Series’s certificates.
Trusted Certificates Import and manage certificates from trusted sources.
System
Host Name Host Name Configure the system and domain name for the NWA1000 Series.
Date/Time Date/Time Configure the current date, time, and time zone in the NWA1000
Series.
WWW Service Control Configure HTTP, HTTPS, and general authentication.
SSH SSH Configure SSH server and SSH service settings.
TELNET TELNET Configure telnet server settings for the NWA1000 Series.
FTP FTP Configure FTP server settings.
SNMP SNMP Configure SNMP communities and services.
Log & Report
Email Daily
Report Email Daily Report Configure where and how to send daily reports and what reports to
send.
Log Setting Log Setting Configure the system log, e-mail logs, and remote syslog servers.
Table 16 Maintenance Menu Screens Summary
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
File Manager Configuration File Manage and upload configuration files for the NWA1000 Series.
Firmware Package View the current firmware version and to upload firmware.
Shell Script Manage and run shell script files for the NWA1000 Series.
Diagnostics Diagnostics Collect diagnostic information.
Table 15 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued)
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
43
5.3.3 Warning Messages
Warning messages, such as those resulting from misconfiguration, display in a pop up window.
Figure 20 Warning Message
5.3.4 Tables and Lists
The Web Configurator tables and lists are quite flexible and provide several options for how to display
their entries.
5.3.4.1 Manipulating Table Display
Here are some of the ways you can manipulate the Web Configurator tables.
1Click a column heading to sort the table’s entries according to that column’s criteria.
2Click the down arrow next to a column heading for more options about how to display the entries. The
options available vary depending on the type of fields in the column. Here are some examples of what
you can do:
• Sort in ascending alphabetical order
• Sort in descending (reverse) alphabetical order
• Select which columns to display
•Group entries by field
LEDs Suppression Enable this feature to keep the LEDs off after the NWA1000 Series
starts.
Locator Enable this feature to see the actual location of the NWA1000 Series
between several devices in the network.
Antenna Antenna Switch Change antenna orientation for the radios.
Reboot Reboot Restart the NWA1000 Series.
Shutdown Shutdown Turn off the NWA1000 Series.
Table 16 Maintenance Menu Screens Summary (continued)
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
44
•Show entries in groups
• Filter by mathematical operators (<, >, or =) or searching for text.
3Select a column heading cell’s right border and drag to re-size the column.
4Select a column heading and drag and drop it to change the column order. A green check mark
displays next to the column’s title when you drag the column to a valid new location.
5Use the icons and fields at the bottom of the table to navigate to different pages of entries and control
how many entries display at a time.
Chapter 5 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
45
5.3.4.2 Working with Table Entries
The tables have icons for working with table entries. A sample is shown next. You can often use the [Shift]
or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries to remove, activate, or deactivate.
Table 17 Common Table Icons
Here are descriptions for the most common table icons.
Table 18 Common Table Icons
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entry’s position in the numbered list is
important (features where the NWA1000 Series applies the table’s entries in order like the
firewall for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the
selected entry.
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the
entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the
table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that
you have not yet applied.
Remove To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The NWA1000 Series confirms you want to
remove it before doing so.
Activate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Object Reference Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use
the entry.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
46
CHAPTER 6
Setup Wizard
6.1 Accessing the Wizard
When you log into the Web Configurator for the first time or when you reset the NWA1000 Series to its
default configuration, the wizard screen displays.
Note: If you have already configured the wizard screens and want to open it again, click the
Wizard icon on the upper right corner of any Web Configurator screen.
6.2 Using the Wizard
This wizard helps you configure the NWA1000 Series IP address, change time zone, daylight saving and
radio settings, and edit an SSID profile to change general wireless and wireless security settings.
6.2.1 Step 1 Time Settings
Use this screen to configure the NWA1000 Series’s country code, time zone and daylight saving time.
•Country Code: Select the country where the NWA1000 Series is located.
Note: The country code field is not available and you cannot change the country code if the
NWA1000 Series products comply with the U.S. laws, policies and regulations and are to
be sold to the U.S. market.
•Time Zone: Select the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time
zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
•Enable Daylight Saving: Select the option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time
when Daylight Saving Time starts and ends.
•Offset allows you to specify how much the clock changes when daylight saving begins and ends.
Enter a number from 1 to 5.5 (by 0.5 increments).
Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard without saving.
Chapter 6 Setup Wizard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
47
Figure 21 Wizard: Time Zone
6.2.2 Step 2 Password and Uplink Connection
Use this screen to configure the NWA1000 Series’s system password and IP address.
Change Password: Enter a new password and retype it to confirm.
Uplink Connection: Select Auto (DHCP) if the NWA1000 Series is connected to a router with the DHCP
server enabled. You then need to check the router for the IP address assigned to the NWA1000 Series in
order to access the NWA1000 Series’s web configurator again.
Otherwise, select Static IP when the NWA1000 Series is NOT connected to a router or you want to assign
it a fixed IP address. You will need to manually enter:
• the NWA1000 Series’s IP address and subnet mask.
• the IP address of the router that helps forward traffic.
• a DNS server's IP address. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address
and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a computer before you can access it.
Click Prev to return to the previous screen. Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard
without saving.
Chapter 6 Setup Wizard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
48
Figure 22 Wizard: Uplink
6.2.3 Step 3 Radio
Use this screen to configure the NWA1000 Series’s radio transmitter(s).
•Channel Width: Select the wireless channel bandwidth you want the NWA1000 Series to use. Because
not all devices support 40 MHz and/or 80 MHz channels, select 20/40/80MHz to allow the NWA1000
Series to adjust the channel bandwidth automatically.
•Channel Selection: Select Auto to have the NWA1000 Series automatically choose a radio channel
that has least interference. Otherwise, select Manual and specify a channel the NWA1000 Series will
use in the 2.4GHz or 5GHz wireless LAN. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the
country you are in.
•Maximum Output Power: Enter the maximum output power of the NWA1000 Series. If there is a high
density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the NWA1000 Series to reduce interference
with other APs.
Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the NWA1000 Series’s effective broadcast
radius.
Click Prev to return to the previous screen. Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard
without saving.
Chapter 6 Setup Wizard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
49
Figure 23 Wizard: Radio
6.2.4 Step 4 SSID
Use this screen to enable, disable or edit an SSID profile.
Select an SSID profile and click the Status switch to turn it on or off. To change an SSID profile’s settings,
such as the SSID (WiFi network name) and WiFi password, double-click the SSID profile entry from the list.
See Section 6.2.4.1 on page 49 for more information.
Note: You cannot add or remove an SSID profile after running the setup wizard.
Figure 24 Wizard: SSID
6.2.4.1 Edit SSID Profile
Use this screen to configure an SSID profile.
Chapter 6 Setup Wizard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
50
The screen varies depending on the security type you selected.
•SSID - Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable characters for the wireless LAN.
•Status - Select Activate to enable the SSID profile. Otherwise, select Inactive to disable the profile.
•VLAN ID: Enter a VLAN ID for the NWA1000 Series to use to tag traffic originating from this SSID.
•Band Mode: Select the wireless band which this profile should use. 2.4 GHz is the frequency used by
IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients. 5 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11ac/a/n wireless clients.
Not all NWA1000 Seriess support both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands.
•Security Type: Select WPA2 to add security on this wireless network. Otherwise, select OPEN to allow
any wireless client to associate this network without authentication.
•PSK (Pre-shared Key): If you set Security Type to WPA2 and select PSK, enter a pre-shared key of
between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal
characters.
•802.1x: Select 802.1x and the Primary / Secondary RADIUS Server check box to have the NWA1000
Series use the specified RADIUS server. You have to enter the IP address, port number and shared
secret password of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.
Click OK to proceed. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving.
Figure 25 Wizard: SSID: Edit (WPA2-PSK)
Chapter 6 Setup Wizard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
51
Figure 26 Wizard: SSID: Edit (802.1x)
6.2.5 Summary
Use this screen to check whether what you have configured is correct. Click Save to apply your settings
and complete the wizard setup. Otherwise, click Prev to return to the previous screen or click Cancel to
close the wizard without saving.
Figure 27 Wizard: Summary
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
52
CHAPTER 7
Dashboard
7.1 Overview
Use the Dashboard screens to check status information about the NWA1000 Series.
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The main Dashboard screen (Section 7.2 on page 52) displays the NWA1000 Series’s general device
information, system status, system resource usage, and interface status. You can also display other
status screens for more information.
7.2 Dashboard
This screen is the first thing you see when you log into the NWA1000 Series. It also appears every time you
click the Dashboard icon in the navigation panel. The Dashboard displays general device information,
system status, system resource usage, and interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit
your needs. You can also collapse, refresh, and close individual widgets.
Figure 28 Dashboard
B
CD
A
Chapter 7 Dashboard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
53
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Dashboard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Widget Settings (A) Use this link to re-open closed widgets. Widgets that are already open appear grayed out.
Refresh Time Setting
(B)
Set the interval for refreshing the information displayed in the widget.
Refresh Now (C) Click this to update the widget’s information immediately.
Close Widget (D) Click this to close the widget. Use Widget Settings to re-open it.
Device Information
System Name This field displays the name used to identify the NWA1000 Series on any network. Click the
icon to open the screen where you can change it.
System Location This field displays the location of the NWA1000 Series. Click the icon to open the screen
where you can change it.
Model Name This field displays the model name of this NWA1000 Series.
Serial Number This field displays the serial number of this NWA1000 Series.
MAC Address
Range This field displays the MAC addresses used by the NWA1000 Series. Each physical port or
wireless radio has one MAC address. The first MAC address is assigned to the Ethernet LAN
port, the second MAC address is assigned to the first radio, and so on.
Firmware Version This field displays the version number and date of the firmware the NWA1000 Series is
currently running. Click the icon to open the screen where you can upload firmware.
Last Firmware
Upgrade Status This field displays whether the latest firmware update was successfully completed.
Last Firmware
Upgrade This field displays the date and time when the last firmware update was made.
System Resources
CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the NWA1000 Series’s processing capability is
currently being used. Hover your cursor over this field to display the Show CPU Usage icon
that takes you to a chart of the NWA1000 Series’s recent CPU usage.
Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the NWA1000 Series’s RAM is currently being used.
Hover your cursor over this field to display the Show Memory Usage icon that takes you to a
chart of the NWA1000 Series’s recent memory usage.
Flash Usage This field displays what percentage of the NWA1000 Series’s onboard flash memory is
currently being used.
Ethernet Neighbor
Local Port
(Description) This field displays the port of the NWA1000 Series, on which the neighboring device is
discovered.
Model Name This field displays the model name of the discovered device.
System Name This field displays the system name of the discovered device.
FW Version This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device.
Port (Description) This field displays the discovered device’s port which is connected to the NWA1000 Series.
IP This field displays the IP address of the discovered device. Click the IP address to access
and manage the discovered device using its web configurator.
MAC This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device.
WDS (Wireless Distribution System) Uplink/Downlink Status
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the root AP or repeater to which the NWA1000 Series is
connected using WDS.
Radio This field displays the radio number on the root AP or repeater to which the NWA1000 Series
is connected using WDS.
Chapter 7 Dashboard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
54
Channel This field displays the channel number on the root AP or repeater to which the NWA1000
Series is connected using WDS.
SSID This field displays the name of the wireless network to which the NWA1000 Series is
connected using WDS.
Security Mode This field displays which secure encryption methods is being used by the NWA1000 Series to
connect to the root AP or repeater using WDS.
Link Status This field displays the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) and transmission/reception
rate of the wireless connection in WDS.
System Status
System Uptime This field displays how long the NWA1000 Series has been running since it last restarted or
was turned on.
Current Date/
Time This field displays the current date and time in the NWA1000 Series. The format is yyyy-mm-
dd hh:mm:ss.
Current Login
User This field displays the user name used to log in to the current session, the amount of
reauthentication time remaining, and the amount of lease time remaining.
Boot Status This field displays details about the NWA1000 Series’s startup state.
OK - The NWA1000 Series started up successfully.
Firmware update OK - A firmware update was successful.
Problematic configuration after firmware update - The application of the configuration
failed after a firmware upgrade.
System default configuration - The NWA1000 Series successfully applied the system default
configuration. This occurs when the NWA1000 Series starts for the first time or you
intentionally reset the NWA1000 Series to the system default settings.
Fallback to lastgood configuration - The NWA1000 Series was unable to apply the startup-
config.conf configuration file and fell back to the lastgood.conf configuration file.
Fallback to system default configuration - The NWA1000 Series was unable to apply the
lastgood.conf configuration file and fell back to the system default configuration file
(system-default.conf).
Booting in progress - The NWA1000 Series is still applying the system configuration.
Management
Mode This shows whether the NWA1000 Series is set to work as a stand alone AP.
Power Mode This displays the NWA1000 Series’s power status.
Full - the NWA1000 Series receives power using a power adaptor and/or through a PoE
switch/injector using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus.
Limited - the NWA1000 Series receives power through a PoE switch/injector using IEEE
802.3af PoE even when it is also connected to a power source using a power adaptor.
When the NWA1000 Series is in limited power mode, the NWA1000 Series throughput
decreases and has just one transmitting radio chain.
It always shows Full if the NWA1000 Series does not support power detection. See Table 1 on
page 12.
Interface Status
Summary
If an Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it, its entry is
displayed in light gray text. Click the Detail icon to go to a (more detailed) summary screen
of interface statistics.
Name This field displays the name of each interface.
Table 19 Dashboard (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Dashboard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
55
7.2.1 CPU Usage
Use this screen to look at a chart of the NWA1000 Series’s recent CPU usage. To access this screen, click
CPU Usage in the dashboard.
Status This field displays the current status of each interface. The possible values depend on what
type of interface it is.
Inactive - The Ethernet interface is disabled.
Down - The Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected.
Speed / Duplex - The Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays the
port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half).
VID This field displays the VLAN ID to which the interface belongs.
IP Addr/Netmask This field displays the current IP address and subnet mask assigned to the interface. If the IP
address is 0.0.0.0, the interface is disabled or did not receive an IP address and subnet mask
via DHCP.
IP Assignment This field displays how the interface gets its IP address.
Static - This interface has a static IP address.
DHCP Client - This interface gets its IP address from a DHCP server.
Action If the interface has a static IP address, this shows n/a.
If the interface has a dynamic IP address, use this field to get or to update the IP address for
the interface. Click Renew to send a new DHCP request to a DHCP server.
WLAN Interface
Status Summary
This displays status information for the WLAN interface.
Status This displays whether or not the WLAN interface is activated.
MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the radio.
Radio This indicates the radio number on the NWA1000 Series.
Band This indicates the wireless frequency band currently being used by the radio.
This shows - when the radio is in monitor mode.
OP Mode This indicates the radio’s operating mode. Operating modes are AP (MBSSID), R oot AP or
Repeater.
Channel This indicates the channel number the radio is using.
Antenna This indicates the antenna orientation for the radio (Wall or Ceiling).
This field is not available if the NWA1000 Series does not allow you to adjust antenna
orientation for each radio using the web configurator or a physical switch. Refer to Table 1
on page 12 to see if your NWA1000 Series has an antenna switch.
Station This displays the number of wireless clients connected to the NWA1000 Series.
AP Information This shows a summary of connected wireless Access Points (APs).
All Sensed Device This sections displays a summary of all wireless devices detected by the network. Click the
link to go to the Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device screen.
Un-Classified AP This displays the number of detected unclassified APs.
Rogue AP This displays the number of detected rogue APs.
Friendly AP This displays the number of detected friendly APs.
Table 19 Dashboard (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Dashboard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
56
Figure 29 Dashboard > CPU Usage
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.2.2 Memory Usage
Use this screen to look at a chart of the NWA1000 Series’s recent memory (RAM) usage. To access this
screen, click Memory Usage in the dashboard.
Figure 30 Dashboard > Memory Usage
Table 20 Dashboard > CPU Usage
LABEL DESCRIPTION
% The y-axis represents the percentage of CPU usage.
time The x-axis shows the time period over which the CPU usage occurred
Refresh Interval Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now Click this to update the information in the window right away.
Chapter 7 Dashboard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
57
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 Dashboard > Memory Usage
LABEL DESCRIPTION
% The y-axis represents the percentage of RAM usage.
time The x-axis shows the time period over which the RAM usage occurred
Refresh Interval Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now Click this to update the information in the window right away.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
58
CHAPTER 8
Monitor
8.1 Overview
Use the Monitor screens to check status and statistics information.
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Network Status screen (Section 8.3 on page 59) displays general LAN interface information and
packet statistics.
• The AP Information > Radio List screen (Section 8.4 on page 62) displays statistics about the wireless
radio transmitters in the NWA1000 Series.
• The Station Info screen (Section 8.5 on page 65) displays statistics pertaining to the associated
stations.
• The WDS Link Info screen (Section 8.6 on page 66) displays statistics about the NWA1000 Series’s WDS
(Wireless Distribution System) connections.
• The Detected Device screen (Section 8.7 on page 67) displays information about suspected rogue
APs.
• The View Log screen (Section 8.8 on page 69) displays the NWA1000 Series’s current log messages.
You can change the way the log is displayed, you can e-mail the log, and you can also clear the log
in this screen.
8.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through the chapter.
Rogue AP
Rogue APs are wireless access points operating in a network’s coverage area that are not under the
control of the network’s administrators, and can open up holes in a network’s security.
Friendly AP
Friendly APs are other wireless access points that are detected in your network, as well as any others that
you know are not a threat (those from neighboring networks, for example).
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
59
8.3 Network Status
Use this screen to look at general Ethernet interface information and packet statistics. To access this
screen, click Monitor > Network Status. The screen varies depending on whether the NWA1000 Series has
an extra Ethernet port (except the uplink port).
Figure 31 Monitor > Network Status (for NWA1000 Series with one Ethernet port)
Figure 32 Monitor > Network Status (for NWA1000 Series with multiple Ethernet ports)
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
60
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 22 Monitor > Network Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface
Summary
IPv6 Interface
Summary
Use the Interface Summary section for IPv4 network settings. Use the IPv6 Interface Summary
section for IPv6 network settings if you connect your NWA1000 Series to an IPv6 network. Both
sections have similar fields as described below.
Name This field displays the name of the physical Ethernet port on the NWA1000 Series.
Status This field displays the current status of each physical port on the NWA1000 Series.
Down - The port is not connected.
Speed / Duplex - The port is connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting
(Full or Half).
VID This field displays the VLAN ID to which the port belongs.
IP Addr/Netmask
IP Address
This field displays the current IP address (and subnet mask) of the interface. If the IP address is
0.0.0.0 (in the IPv4 network) or :: (in the IPv6 network), the interface does not have an IP address
yet.
IP Assignment This field displays how the interface gets its IPv4 address.
Static - This interface has a static IPv4 address.
DHCP Client - This interface gets its IPv4 address from a DHCP server.
Action Use this field to get or to update the IP address for the interface. Click Renew to send a new
DHCP request to a DHCP server. If the interface cannot use one of these ways to get or to
update its IP address, this field displays n/a.
Port Statistics
Table
Poll Interval Enter how often you want this window to be updated automatically, and click Set Interval.
Set Interval Click this to set the Poll Interval the screen uses.
Stop Click this to stop the window from updating automatically. You can start it again by setting the
Poll Interval and clicking Set Interval.
Switch to Graphic
View
Click this to display the port statistics as a line graph.
Name This field displays the name of the interface.
Status This field displays the current status of the physical port.
Down - The physical port is not connected.
Speed / Duplex - The physical port is connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex
setting (Full or Half).
TxPkts This field displays the number of packets transmitted from the NWA1000 Series on the physical
port since it was last connected.
RxPkts This field displays the number of packets received by the NWA1000 Series on the physical port
since it was last connected.
Tx Bcast This field displays the number of broadcast packets transmitted from the NWA1000 Series on the
physical port since it was last connected.
Rx Bcast This field displays the number of broadcast packets received by the NWA1000 Series on the
physical port since it was last connected.
Collisions This field displays the number of collisions on the physical port since it was last connected.
Tx This field displays the transmission speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the one-
second interval before the screen updated.
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
61
8.3.1 Port Statistics Graph
Use the port statistics graph to look at a line graph of packet statistics for the Ethernet port. To view, click
Monitor > Network Status and then the Switch to Graphic View button.
This screen is NOT available on the NWA1000 Series that has an extra Ethernet port (except the uplink
port).
Figure 33 Monitor > Network Status > Switch to Graphic View
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Rx This field displays the reception speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the one-
second interval before the screen updated.
Up Time This field displays how long the physical port has been connected.
System Up Time This field displays how long the NWA1000 Series has been running since it last restarted or was
turned on.
Table 22 Monitor > Network Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 23 Monitor > Network Status > Switch to Graphic View
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now Click this to update the information in the window right away.
Switch to Grid
View
Click this to display the port statistics as a table.
Kbps/Mbps The y-axis represents the speed of transmission or reception.
Time The x-axis shows the time period over which the transmission or reception occurred.
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
62
8.4 Radio List
Use this screen to view statistics for the NWA1000 Series’s wireless radio transmitters. To access this screen,
click Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List.
Figure 34 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List (for NWA1000 Series that supports WDS)
Figure 35 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List (for NWA1000 Series that doesn’t support WDS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
TX This line represents traffic transmitted from the NWA1000 Series on the physical port since it was
last connected.
RX This line represents the traffic received by the NWA1000 Series on the physical port since it was
last connected.
Last Update This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated.
Table 23 Monitor > Network Status > Switch to Graphic View (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 24 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
More Information Click this to view additional information about the selected radio’s wireless traffic and station
count. Information spans a 24 hour period.
Status This displays whether or not the radio is enabled.
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
63
8.4.1 AP Mode Radio Information
This screen allows you to view a selected radio’s SSID details, wireless traffic statistics and station count
for the preceding 24 hours. To access this window, select a radio and click the More Information button
in the Radio List screen.
Loading This indicates the AP’s load balance status (UnderLoad or OverLoad) when load balancing is
enabled on the NWA1000 Series. Otherwise, it shows - when load balancing is disabled or the
radio is in monitor mode.
MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the radio.
Radio This indicates the radio number on the NWA1000 Series to which it belongs.
OP Mode This indicates the radio’s operating mode. Operating modes are AP (MBSSID), Root AP or
Repeater.
AP/WDS Profile This indicates the AP profile name and WDS profile name to which the radio belongs.
This field is available only on the NWA1000 Series that supports WDS.
Profile This indicates the AP profile name to which the radio belongs.
This field is available only on the NWA1000 Series that doesn’t support WDS.
Frequency Band This indicates the wireless frequency band currently being used by the radio.
This shows - when the radio is in monitor mode.
Channel This indicates the radio’s channel ID.
Tx Power This displays the output power of the radio.
Station This displays the number of wireless clients connected to this radio on the NWA1000 Series.
Rx This displays the total number of packets received by the radio.
Tx This displays the total number of packets transmitted by the radio.
Table 24 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
64
Figure 36 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SSID Detail This list shows information about all the wireless clients that have connected to the specified
radio over the preceding 24 hours.
# This is the items sequential number in the list. It has no bearing on the actual data in this list.
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
65
8.5 Station List
Use this screen to view statistics pertaining to the associated stations (or “wireless clients”). Click Monitor
> Wireless > Station Info to access this screen.
Figure 37 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
SSID Name This displays an SSID associated with this radio. There can be up to eight maximum.
BSSID This displays a BSSID associated with this radio. The BSSID is tied to the SSID.
Security
Mode This displays the security mode in which the SSID is operating.
VLAN This displays the VLAN ID associated with the SSID.
Traffic Statistics This graph displays the overall traffic information of the radio over the preceding 24 hours.
Kbps/Mbps This y-axis represents the amount of data moved across this radio in megabytes per second.
Time This x-axis represents the amount of time over which the data moved across this radio.
Station Count This graph displays the connected station information of the radio over the preceding 24 hours
Stations The y-axis represents the number of connected stations.
Time The x-axis shows the time period over which a station was connected.
Last Update This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated.
OK Click this to close this window.
Cancel Click this to close this window.
Table 25 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 26 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the station’s index number in this list.
IP Address This is the station’s IP address.
MAC Address This is the station’s MAC address.
Radio This is the radio number on the NWA1000 Series to which the station is connected.
Capability This displays the supported standard currently being used by the station or the standards
supported by the station.
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
66
8.6 WDS Link Info
Use this screen to view the WDS traffic statistics between the NWA1000 Series and a root AP or repeaters.
Click Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info to access this screen.
Figure 38 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
SSID Name This indicates the name of the wireless network to which the station is connected. A single AP
can have multiple SSIDs or networks.
Security Mode This indicates which secure encryption methods is being used by the station to connect to the
network.
Signal Strength This is the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) of the station’s wireless connection.
Tx Rate This is the maximum transmission rate of the station.
Rx Rate This is the maximum reception rate of the station.
Association Time This displays the time the station first associated with the NWA1000 Series’s wireless network.
Refresh Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page.
Table 26 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 27 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WDS Uplink Info
WDS Downlink
Info
Uplink refers to the WDS link from the repeaters to the root AP.
Downlink refers to the WDS link from the root AP to the repeaters.
When the NWA1000 Series is in root AP mode and connected to a repeater, only the downlink
information is displayed.
When the NWA1000 Series is in repeater mode and connected to a root AP directly or via
another repeater, the uplink information is displayed.
When the NWA1000 Series is in repeater mode and connected to a root AP and other
repeater(s), both the uplink and downlink information would be displayed.
# This is the index number of the root AP or repeater in this list.
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
67
8.7 Detected Device
Use this screen to view information about suspected rogue APs. Click Monitor > Wireless > Detected
Device to access this screen.
Note: Turn on rogue AP detection in the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen to detect
rogue APs.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the root AP or repeater to which the NWA1000 Series is connected
using WDS.
Radio This is the radio number on the root AP or repeater to which the NWA1000 Series is connected
using WDS.
SSID Name This indicates the name of the wireless network to which the NWA1000 Series is connected using
WDS.
Security Mode This indicates which secure encryption methods is being used by the NWA1000 Series to
connect to the root AP or repeater using WDS.
Signal Strength This is the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) of the wireless connection in WDS.
Tx Rate This is the maximum transmission rate of the root AP or repeater to which the NWA1000 Series is
connected using WDS.
Rx Rate This is the maximum reception rate of the root AP or repeater to which the NWA1000 Series is
connected using WDS.
Association Time This displays the time the NWA1000 Series first associated with the wireless network using WDS.
Refresh Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page.
Table 27 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
68
Figure 39 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 28 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Discovered APs
Rogue AP This shows how many devices are detected as rogue APs.
Suspected rogue
AP
This shows how many devices are detected as possible rogue APs by classification rule.
Friendly AP This shows how many devices are detected as friendly APs.
Un-classified AP This shows how many devices are detected, but have not been classified by the NWA1000
Series.
Detect Now Click this button for the NWA1000 Series to scan for APs in the network.
Detected Device
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
69
8.8 View Log
Log messages are stored in two separate logs, one for regular log messages and one for debugging
messages. In the regular log, you can look at all the log messages by selecting All Logs, or you can
select a specific category of log messages (for example, user). You can also look at the debugging log
by selecting Debug Log. All debugging messages have the same priority.
To access this screen, click Monitor > Log. The log is displayed in the following screen.
Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages
automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log
message first.
Events that generate an alert (as well as a log message) display in red. Regular logs display in black.
Click a column’s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column’s criteria. Click the heading cell
again to reverse the sort order.
Mark as Rogue
AP
Click this button to mark the selected AP as a rogue AP. For more on managing rogue APs, see
the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 82).
Mark as Friendly
AP
Click this button to mark the selected AP as a friendly AP. For more on managing friendly APs,
see the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 82).
# This is the detected device’s index number in this list.
Role This indicates the detected device’s role (such as friendly or rogue).
Classified by This indicates the detected device’s classification rule.
MAC Address This indicates the detected device’s MAC address.
SSID Name This indicates the detected device’s SSID.
Channel ID This indicates the detected device’s channel ID.
802.11 Mode This indicates the 802.11 mode (a/b/g/n) transmitted by the detected device.
Security This indicates the encryption method (if any) used by the detected device.
Description This displays the detected device’s description. For more on managing friendly and rogue APs,
see the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 82).
Last Seen This indicates the last time the device was detected by the NWA1000 Series.
Refresh Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page.
Table 28 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
70
Figure 40 Monitor > Log > View Log
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 29 Monitor > Log > View Log
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show Filter / Hide
Filter
Click this button to show or hide the filter settings.
If the filter settings are hidden, the Display, Email Log Now, Refresh, and Clear Log fields are
available.
If the filter settings are shown, the Display, Priority, Source Address, Destination Address, Source
Interface, Destination Interface, Protocol, Keyword, and Search fields are available.
Display Select the category of log message(s) you want to view. You can also view All Logs at one
time, or you can view the Debug Log.
Priority This displays when you show the filter. Select the priority of log messages to display. The log
displays the log messages with this priority or higher. Choices are: any, emerg, alert, crit, error,
warn, notice, and info, from highest priority to lowest priority. This field is read-only if the
Category is Debug Log.
Source Address This displays when you show the filter. Type the source IP address of the incoming packet that
generated the log message. Do not include the port in this filter.
Chapter 8 Monitor
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
71
The Web Configurator saves the filter settings if you leave the View Log screen and return to it later.
Destination
Address
This displays when you show the filter. Type the IP address of the destination of the incoming
packet when the log message was generated. Do not include the port in this filter.
Source Interface This displays when you show the filter. Select the source interface of the packet that generated
the log message.
Destination
Interface
This displays when you show the filter. Select the destination interface of the packet that
generated the log message.
Protocol This displays when you show the filter. Select a service protocol whose log messages you would
like to see.
Keyword This displays when you show the filter. Type a keyword to look for in the Message, Source,
Destination and Note fields. If a match is found in any field, the log message is displayed. You
can use up to 63 alphanumeric characters and the underscore, as well as punctuation marks
()’ ,:;?! +-*/= #$% @ ; the period, double quotes, and brackets are not allowed.
Search This displays when you show the filter. Click this button to update the log using the current filter
settings.
Email Log Now Click this button to send log messages to the Active e-mail addresses specified in the Send Log
To field on the Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings screen.
Refresh Click this to update the list of logs.
Clear Log Click this button to clear the whole log, regardless of what is currently displayed on the screen.
#This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log message.
Time This field displays the time the log message was recorded.
Priority This field displays the priority of the log message. It has the same range of values as the Priority
field above.
Category This field displays the log that generated the log message. It is the same value used in the
Display and (other) Category fields.
Message This field displays the reason the log message was generated. The text “[count=x]”, where x is a
number, appears at the end of the Message field if log consolidation is turned on and multiple
entries were aggregated to generate into this one.
Source This field displays the source IP address and the port number in the event that generated the
log message.
Source Interface This field displays the source interface of the packet that generated the log message.
Destination This field displays the destination IP address and the port number of the event that generated
the log message.
Destination
Interface
This field displays the destination interface of the packet that generated the log message.
Protocol This field displays the service protocol in the event that generated the log message.
Note This field displays any additional information about the log message.
Table 29 Monitor > Log > View Log (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
72
CHAPTER 9
Network
9.1 Overview
This chapter describes how you can configure the management IP address and VLAN settings of your
NWA1000 Series.
The Internet Protocol (IP) address identifies a device on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network.
These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Figure 41 IP Setup
The figure above illustrates one possible setup of your NWA1000 Series. The gateway IP address is
192.168.1.1 and the managed IP address of the NWA1000 Series is 192.168.1.2 (default), but if the
NWA1000 Series is assigned an IP address by a DHCP server, the default (192.168.1.2) will not be used.
The gateway and the NWA1000 Series must belong in the same IP subnet to be able to communicate
with each other.
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The IP Setting screen (Section 9.2 on page 72) configures the NWA1000 Series’s LAN IP address.
• The VLAN screen (Section 9.3 on page 74) configures the NWA1000 Series’s VLAN settings.
• The NCC Discovery screen (Section 9.4 on page 77) configures the NWA1000 Series’s Nebula Control
Center (NCC) discovery settings.
9.2 IP Setting
Use this screen to configure the IP address for your NWA1000 Series. To access this screen, click
Configuration > Network > IP Setting.
Chapter 9 Network
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
73
Figure 42 Configuration > Network > IP Setting
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 30 Configuration > Network > IP Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Address
Assignment
Get
Automatically Select this to make the interface a DHCP client and automatically get the IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway address from a DHCP server.
Use Fixed IP
Address Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually.
IP Address Enter the IP address for this interface.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates
what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network.
Gateway Enter the IP address of the gateway. The NWA1000 Series sends packets to the gateway
when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be
on the same network as the interface.
DNS Server IP
Address Enter the IP address of the DNS server.
IPv6 Address
Assignment
Enable Stateless
Address Auto-
configuration
(SLAAC)
Select this to enable IPv6 stateless auto-configuration on the NWA1000 Series. The NWA1000
Series will generate an IPv6 address itself from a prefix obtained from an IPv6 router in the
network.
Chapter 9 Network
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
74
9.3 VLAN
This section discusses how to configure the NWA1000 Series’s VLAN settings.
Figure 43 Management VLAN Setup
In the figure above, to access and manage the NWA1000 Series from computer A, the NWA1000 Series
and switch B’s ports to which computer A and the NWA1000 Series are connected should be in the
same VLAN.
Link-Local
Address This displays the IPv6 link-local address and the network prefix that the NWA1000 Series
generates itself for the LAN interface.
IPv6 Address/
Prefix Length Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix length for the LAN interface if you want to use a static
IP address. This field is optional.
The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all
computers in the network, that is, the network address.
Gateway Enter the IPv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using colon (:) hexadecimal
notation.
Metric Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on the LAN interface. The NWA1000 Series decides
which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If
two or more gateways have the same priority, the NWA1000 Series uses the one that was
configured first. Enter zero to set the metric to 1024 for IPv6.
DHCPv6 Client Select this option to set the NWA1000 Series to act as a DHCPv6 client.
DUID This field displays the DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID) of the NWA1000 Series, which is unique
and used for identification purposes when the NWA1000 Series is exchanging DHCPv6
messages with others. See Appendix B on page 235 for more information.
Request Address Select this option to get an IPv6 address from the DHCPv6 server.
DHCPv6 Request
Options
Select this option to determine what additional information to get from the DHCPv6 server.
DNS Server Select this option to obtain the IP address of the DNS server.
NTP Server Select this option to obtain the IP address of the NTP server.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 30 Configuration > Network > IP Setting (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 Network
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
75
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable
logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and
every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN
membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority.
The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to
process the frame across the network.
Use this screen to configure the VLAN settings for your NWA1000 Series. To access this screen, click
Configuration > Network > VLAN.
The screen varies depending on whether the NWA1000 Series has an extra Ethernet port (except the
uplink port).
Figure 44 Configuration > Network > VLAN (for NWA1000 Series with multiple Ethernet ports)
Chapter 9 Network
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
76
Figure 45 Configuration > Network > VLAN (for NWA1000 Series with one Ethernet port)
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 31 Configuration > Network > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Settings
Management
VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID for the NWA1000 Series.
As Native VLAN Select this option to treat this VLAN ID as a VLAN created on the NWA1000 Series and not
one assigned to it from outside the network.
LAN Setting
Port Setting
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the
entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the
table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that
you have not yet applied.
Activate/
Inactivate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click
Inactivate.
# This is the index number of the port.
Status This field indicates whether the port is enabled (a yellow bulb) or not (a gray bulb).
Port This field displays the name of the port.
PVID This field displays the port number of the VLAN ID.
VLAN Configuration
Add Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entry’s position in the numbered list is
important (features where the NWA1000 Series applies the table’s entries in order like the
SSID for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the
selected entry.
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the
entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the
table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that
you have not yet applied.
Remove To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The NWA1000 Series confirms you want to
remove it before doing so.
Activate/
Inactivate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click
Inactivate.
# This is the index number of the VLAN ID
Status This field indicates whether the VLAN is enabled (a yellow bulb) or not (a gray bulb).
Name This field displays the name of each VLAN.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID.
Member This field displays the VLAN membership to which the port belongs.
Chapter 9 Network
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
77
9.4 NCC Discovery
You can manage the NWA1000 Series through the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC). Use this screen to
configure the proxy server settings if the NWA1000 Series is behind a proxy server.
To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > NCC Discovery.
Figure 46 Configuration > Network > NCC Discovery
Each field is described in the following table.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 31 Configuration > Network > VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 32 Configuration > Network > NCC Discovery
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select this option to turn on NCC discovery on the NWA1000 Series. The NWA1000 Series
will try to discover the NCC and go into cloud mode when it is connected to the
Internet and has been registered in the NCC.
If NCC discovery is disabled, the NWA1000 Series will not discover the NCC and remain
in standalone mode.
Use Proxy to Access NCC If the NWA1000 Series is behind a proxy server, you need to select this option and
configure the proxy server settings so that the NWA1000 Series can access the NCC
through the proxy server.
Proxy Server Enter the IP address of the proxy server.
Proxy Port Enter the service port number used by the proxy server.
Authentication Select this option if the proxy server requires authentication before it grants access to
the NCC.
User Name Enter your proxy user name.
Password Enter your proxy password.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
78
CHAPTER 10
Wireless
10.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NWA1000 Series.
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 47 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are called
wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices (such as the
printer) or with the Internet. Your NWA1000 Series is the AP.
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The AP Management screen (Section 10.2 on page 79) manages the NWA1000 Series’s general
wireless settings.
• The Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 82) allows you to assign APs either to the rogue AP list or
the friendly AP list.
• The Load Balancing screen (Section 10.4 on page 85) configures network traffic load balancing
between the APs and the NWA1000 Series.
• The DCS screen (Section 10.5 on page 87) configures dynamic radio channel selection.
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
79
10.1.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Station / Wireless Client
A station or wireless client is any wireless-capable device that can connect to an AP using a wireless
signal.
Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS)
Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) is a feature that allows an AP to automatically select the radio
channel upon which it broadcasts by scanning the area around it and determining what channels are
currently being used by other devices.
Load Balancing (Wireless)
Wireless load balancing is the process where you limit the number of connections allowed on an wireless
access point (AP) or you limit the amount of wireless traffic transmitted and received on it so the AP
does not become overloaded.
10.2 AP Management
Use this screen to manage the NWA1000 Series’s general wireless settings. Click Configuration > Wireless
> AP Management to access this screen.
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
80
Figure 48 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 33 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Radio 1 Setting
Radio 1 Activate Select the check box to enable the NWA1000 Series’s first (default) radio.
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
81
Radio 1 OP Mode Select the operating mode for radio 1.
AP Mode means the radio can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their data
traffic through to the NWA1000 Series to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an
upstream gateway for managing).
Root AP means the radio acts as an AP and also supports the wireless connections with
other APs (in repeater mode) to form a WDS (Wireless Distribution System) to extend its
wireless network.
Repeater means the radio can establish a wireless connection with other APs (in either root
AP or repeater mode) to form a WDS.
Radio 1 Profile Select the radio profile the radio uses.
Note: You can only apply a 2.4G AP radio profile to radio 1. Otherwise, the first
radio will not be working.
Radio 1 WDS Profile This field is available only when the radio is in Root AP or Repeater mode.
Select the WDS profile the radio uses to connect to a root AP or repeater.
Uplink Selection
Mode
This field is available only when the radio is in Repeater mode.
Select AUTO to have the NWA1000 Series automatically use the settings in the applied WDS
profile to connect to a root AP or repeater.
Select Manual to have the NWA1000 Series connect to the root AP or repeater with the
MAC address specified in the Radio 1 Uplink MAC Address field.
Max Output Power Enter the maximum output power (between 0 to 30 dBm) of the NWA1000 Series in this field.
If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the NWA1000
Series to reduce interference with other APs.
Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the NWA1000 Series’s effective
broadcast radius.
MBSSID Settings
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the
entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the
table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that
you have not yet applied.
# This field shows the index number of the SSID
SSID Profile This field displays the SSID profile that is associated with the radio profile.
Radio 2 Setting
Radio 2 Activate This displays if the NWA1000 Series has a second radio.
Select the check box to enable the NWA1000 Series’s second radio.
Radio 2 OP Mode This displays if the NWA1000 Series has a second radio. Select the operating mode for radio
2.
AP Mode means the radio can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their data
traffic through to the NWA1000 Series to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an
upstream gateway for managing).
Root AP means the radio acts as an AP and also supports the wireless connections with
other APs (in repeater mode) to form a WDS to extend its wireless network.
Repeater means the radio can establish a wireless connection with other APs (in either root
AP or repeater mode) to form a WDS.
Table 33 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
82
10.3 Rogue AP
Use this screen to assign APs either to the rogue AP list or the friendly AP list. A rogue AP is a wireless
access point operating in a network’s coverage area that is not under the control of the network
administrator, and which can potentially open up holes in a network’s security.
Click Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP to access this screen.
Radio 2 Profile This displays if the NWA1000 Series has a second radio. Select the radio profile the radio
uses.
Note: You can only apply a 5G AP radio profile to radio 2. Otherwise, the second
radio will not be working.
Radio 2 WDS Profile This field is available only when the radio is in Root AP or Repeater mode.
Select the WDS profile the radio uses to connect to a root AP or repeater.
Uplink Selection
Mode
This field is available only when the radio is in Repeater mode.
Select AUTO to have the NWA1000 Series automatically use the settings in the applied WDS
profile to connect to a root AP or repeater.
Select Manual to have the NWA1000 Series connect to the root AP or repeater with tbe
MAC address specified in the Radio 2 Uplink MAC Address field.
Max Output Power Enter the maximum output power (between 0 to 30 dBm) of the NWA1000 Series in this field.
If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the NWA1000
Series to reduce interference with other APs.
Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the NWA1000 Series’s effective
broadcast radius.
MBSSID Settings
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the
entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the
table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that
you have not yet applied.
# This field shows the index number of the SSID
SSID Profile This field shows the SSID profile that is associated with the radio profile.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 33 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
83
Figure 49 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 34 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Rogue AP Detection
Setting
Enable Rogue AP
Detection
Select this option to detect Rogue APs in the network.
Suspected Rogue AP
Classification Rule
Click the check boxes (Weak Security (Open, WEP, WPA-PSK), Hidden SSID, SSID
Keyword) of the characteristics an AP should have for the NWA1000 Series to rule it as
a Rogue AP.
Add Click this to add an SSID Keyword.
Edit Select an SSID Keyword and click this button to modify it.
Remove Select an existing SSID keyword and click this button to delete it.
#This is the SSID Keyword’s index number in this list.
SSID Keyword This field displays the SSID Keyword.
Rogue/Friendly AP List
Add Click this button to add an AP to the list and assign it either friendly or rogue status.
Edit Select an AP in the list to edit and reassign its status.
Remove Select an AP in the list to remove.
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
84
10.3.1 Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly List
Click Add or select an AP and click the Edit button in the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP table to
display this screen.
Figure 50 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP > Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly AP List
Each field is described in the following table.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface.
Role This field indicates whether the selected AP is a rogue-ap or a friendly-ap. To change
the AP’s role, click the Edit button.
MAC Address This field indicates the AP’s radio MAC address.
Description This field displays the AP’s description. You can modify this by clicking the Edit button.
Rogue/Friendly AP List
Importing/Exporting
These controls allow you to export the current list of rogue and friendly APs or import
existing lists.
File Path / Browse /
Importing Enter the file name and path of the list you want to import or click the Browse button
to locate it. Once the File Path field has been populated, click Importing to bring the
list into the NWA1000 Series.
You need to wait a while for the importing process to finish.
Exporting Click this button to export the current list of either rogue APs or friendly APS.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 34 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 35 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP > Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly AP List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC Enter the MAC address of the AP you want to add to the list. A MAC address is a unique
hardware identifier in the following hexadecimal format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx where xx is a
hexadecimal number separated by colons.
Description Enter up to 60 characters for the AP’s description. Spaces and underscores are allowed.
Role Select either Rogue AP or Friendly AP for the AP’s role.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to close the window with changes unsaved.
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
85
10.4 Load Balancing
Use this screen to configure wireless network traffic load balancing between the APs on your network.
Click Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing to access this screen.
Figure 51 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 36 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Load
Balancing
Select this to enable load balancing on the NWA1000 Series.
Use this section to configure wireless network traffic load balancing between the managed
APs in this group.
Mode Select a mode by which load balancing is carried out.
Select By Station Number to balance network traffic based on the number of specified
stations connected to the NWA1000 Series.
Select By Traffic Level to balance network traffic based on the volume generated by the
stations connected to the NWA1000 Series.
Select By Smart Classroom to balance network traffic based on the number of specified
stations connected to the NWA1000 Series. The NWA1000 Series ignores association request
and authentication request packets from any new station when the maximum number of
stations is reached.
If you select By Station Number or By Traffic Level, once the threshold is crossed (either the
maximum station numbers or with network traffic), the NWA1000 Series delays association
request and authentication request packets from any new station that attempts to make a
connection. This allows the station to automatically attempt to connect to another, less
burdened AP if one is available.
Max Station
Number Enter the threshold number of stations at which the NWA1000 Series begins load balancing
its connections.
Traffic Level Select the threshold traffic level at which the NWA1000 Series begins load balancing its
connections (Low, Medium, High).
The maximum bandwidth allowed for each level is:
•Low - 11 Mbps,
•Medium - 23 Mbps
•High - 35M bps
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
86
10.4.1 Disassociating and Delaying Connections
When your AP becomes overloaded, there are two basic responses it can take. The first one is to
“delay” a client connection. This means that the AP withholds the connection until the data transfer
throughput is lowered or the client connection is picked up by another AP. If the client is picked up by
another AP then the original AP cannot resume the connection.
For example, here the AP has a balanced bandwidth allotment of 6 Mbps. If laptop R connects and it
pushes the AP over its allotment, say to 7 Mbps, then the AP delays the red laptop’s connection until it
can afford the bandwidth or the laptop is picked up by a different AP with bandwidth to spare.
Figure 52 Delaying a Connection
Disassociate
station when
overloaded
This function is enabled by default and the disassociation priority is always Signal Strength
when you set Mode to By Smart Classroom.
Select this option to disassociate wireless clients connected to the AP when it becomes
overloaded. If you do not enable this option, then the AP simply delays the connection until
it can afford the bandwidth it requires, or it transfers the connection to another AP within its
broadcast radius.
The disassociation priority is determined automatically by the NWA1000 Series and is as
follows:
•Idle Timeout - Devices that have been idle the longest will be kicked first. If none of the
connected devices are idle, then the priority shifts to Signal Strength.
•Signal Strength - Devices with the weakest signal strength will be kicked first.
Note: If you enable this function, you should ensure that there are multiple APs
within the broadcast radius that can accept any rejected or kicked
wireless clients; otherwise, a wireless client attempting to connect to an
overloaded AP will be disassociated permanently and never be allowed to
connect.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 36 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
87
The second response your AP can take is to kick the connections that are pushing it over its balanced
bandwidth allotment.
Figure 53 Kicking a Connection
Connections are kicked based on either idle timeout or s ignal strength . The NWA1000 Series first looks to
see which devices have been idle the longest, then starts kicking them in order of highest idle time. If no
connections are idle, the next criteria the NWA1000 Series analyzes is signal strength. Devices with the
weakest signal strength are kicked first.
10.5 DCS
Use this screen to configure dynamic radio channel selection. Click Configuration > Wireless > DCS to
access this screen.
Figure 54 Configuration > Wireless > DCS
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 37 Configuration > Wireless > DCS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select Now Click this to have the NWA1000 Series scan for and select an available channel
immediately.
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
88
10.6 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the features described in this
chapter.
Dynamic Channel Selection
When numerous APs broadcast within a given area, they introduce the possibility of heightened radio
interference, especially if some or all of them are broadcasting on the same radio channel. If the
interference becomes too great, then the network administrator must open his AP configuration options
and manually change the channel to one that no other AP is using (or at least a channel that has a
lower level of interference) in order to give the connected stations a minimum degree of interference.
Dynamic channel selection frees the network administrator from this task by letting the AP do it
automatically. The AP can scan the area around it looking for the channel with the least amount of
interference.
In the 2.4 GHz spectrum, each channel from 1 to 13 is broken up into discrete 22 MHz segments that are
spaced 5 MHz apart. Channel 1 is centered on 2.412 GHz while channel 13 is centered on 2.472 GHz.
Figure 55 An Example Three-Channel Deployment
Three channels are situated in such a way as to create almost no interference with one another if used
exclusively: 1, 6 and 11. When an AP broadcasts on any of these three channels, it should not interfere
with neighboring APs as long as they are also limited to same trio.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 37 Configuration > Wireless > DCS (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
89
Figure 56 An Example Four-Channel Deployment
However, some regions require the use of other channels and often use a safety scheme with the
following four channels: 1, 4, 7 and 11. While they are situated sufficiently close to both each other and
the three so-called “safe” channels (1,6 and 11) that interference becomes inevitable, the severity of it is
dependent upon other factors: proximity to the affected AP, signal strength, activity, and so on.
Finally, there is an alternative four channel scheme for ETSI, consisting of channels 1, 5, 9, 13. This offers
significantly less overlap that the other one.
Figure 57 An Alternative Four-Channel Deployment
Load Balancing
Because there is a hard upper limit on an AP’s wireless bandwidth, load balancing can be crucial in
areas crowded with wireless users. Rather than let every user connect and subsequently dilute the
available bandwidth to the point where each connecting device receives a meager trickle, the load
balanced AP instead limits the incoming connections as a means to maintain bandwidth integrity.
There are three kinds of wireless load balancing available on the NWA1000 Series:
Load balancing by station number limits the number of devices allowed to connect to your AP. If you
know exactly how many stations you want to let connect, choose this option.
For example, if your company’s graphic design team has their own AP and they have 10 computers,
you can load balance for 10. Later, if someone from the sales department visits the graphic design
team’s offices for a meeting and he tries to access the network, his computer’s connection is delayed,
giving it the opportunity to connect to a different, neighboring AP. If he still connects to the AP
regardless of the delay, then the AP may boot other people who are already connected in order to
associate with the new connection.
Load balancing by smart classroom also limits the number of devices allowed to connect to your AP.
But any new connections will be just rejected when the AP is overloaded.
Chapter 10 Wireless
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
90
Load balancing by traffic level limits the number of connections to the AP based on maximum
bandwidth available. If you are uncertain as to the exact number of wireless connections you will have
then choose this option. By setting a maximum bandwidth cap, you allow any number of devices to
connect as long as their total bandwidth usage does not exceed the configured bandwidth cap
associated with this setting. Once the cap is hit, any new connections are rejected or delayed provided
that there are other APs in range.
Imagine a coffee shop in a crowded business district that offers free wireless connectivity to its
customers. The coffee shop owner can’t possibly know how many connections his AP will have at any
given moment. As such, he decides to put a limit on the bandwidth that is available to his customers but
not on the actual number of connections he allows. This means anyone can connect to his wireless
network as long as the AP has the bandwidth to spare. If too many people connect and the AP hits its
bandwidth cap then all new connections must basically wait for their turn or get shunted to the nearest
identical AP.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
91
CHAPTER 11
User
11.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to set up user accounts and user settings for the NWA1000 Series.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The User screen (see Section 11.2 on page 92) provides a summary of all user accounts.
•The Setting screen (see Section 11.3 on page 94) controls default settings, login settings, lockout
settings, and other user settings for the NWA1000 Series.
11.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
User Account
A user account defines the privileges of a user logged into the NWA1000 Series. User accounts are used
in controlling access to configuration and services in the NWA1000 Series.
User Types
These are the types of user accounts the NWA1000 Series uses.
Note: The default admin account is always authenticated locally, regardless of the
authentication method setting.
Table 38 Types of User Accounts
TYPE ABILITIES LOGIN METHOD(S)
Admin Users
admin Change NWA1000 Series configuration (web,
CLI)
WWW, TELNET, SSH, FTP
limited-admin Look at NWA1000 Series configuration (web,
CLI)
Perform basic diagnostics (CLI)
WWW, TELNET, SSH
Access Users
user Used for the embedded RADIUS server and
SNMPv3 user access
Browse user-mode commands (CLI)
Chapter 11 User
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
92
11.2 User Summary
The User screen provides a summary of all user accounts. To access this screen click Configuration >
Object > User.
Figure 58 Configuration > Object > User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
11.2.1 Add/Edit User
The User Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new user account or edit an existing one.
11.2.1.1 Rules for User Names
Enter a user name from 1 to 31 characters.
The user name can only contain the following characters:
• Alphanumeric A-z 0-9 (there is no unicode support)
• _ [underscores]
Table 39 Configuration > Object > User
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this to create a new entry.
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the
entry’s settings.
Remove To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The NWA1000 Series confirms you want to
remove it before doing so.
Object Reference Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use
the entry.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
User Name This field displays the user name of each user.
User Type This field displays type of user this account was configured as.
•admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the NWA1000 Series
•limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the NWA1000 Series but not to
change it
•user - this user has access to the NWA1000 Series’s services but cannot look at the
configuration
Description This field displays the description for each user.
Chapter 11 User
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
93
• - [dashes]
The first character must be alphabetical (A-Z a-z), an underscore (_), or a dash (-). Other limitations on
user names are:
• User names are case-sensitive. If you enter a user 'bob' but use 'BOB' when connecting via CIFS or FTP,
it will use the account settings used for 'BOB' not ‘bob’.
• User names have to be different than user group names.
• Here are the reserved user names:
To access this screen, go to the User screen, and click Add or Edit.
Figure 59 Configuration > Object > User > Add/Edit A User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
•adm •admin •any •bin •daemon
•debug •devicehaecived•ftp •games •halt
•ldap-users •lp •mail •news •nobody
• operator • radius-users • root • shutdown • sshd
• sync • uucp • zyxel
Table 40 Configuration > User > User > Add/Edit A User
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Name Type the user name for this user account. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters,
underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-
sensitive. User names have to be different than user group names, and some words are
reserved.
User Type Select what type of user this is. Choices are:
•admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the NWA1000 Series
•limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the NWA1000 Series but not to
change it
•user - this is used for embedded RADIUS server and SNMPv3 user access
Password Enter the password of this user account. It can consist of 4 - 63 alphanumeric characters.
Retype Re-enter the password to make sure you have entered it correctly.
Description Enter the description of each user, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters.
Default descriptions are provided.
Chapter 11 User
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
94
11.3 Setting
This screen controls default settings, login settings, lockout settings, and other user settings for the
NWA1000 Series.
To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > User > Setting.
Authentication
Timeout Settings
This field is not available if the user type is user.
If you want to set authentication timeout to a value other than the default settings, select
Use Manual Settings then fill your preferred values in the fields that follow.
Lease Time This field is not available if the user type is user.
Enter the number of minutes this user has to renew the current session before the user is
logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of
minutes unlimited. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the
Web Configurator.
Reauthentication
Time
This field is not available if the user type is user.
Type the number of minutes this user can be logged into the NWA1000 Series in one session
before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to
make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to
renew the session without logging out.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.
Table 40 Configuration > User > User > Add/Edit A User (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 User
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
95
Figure 60 Configuration > Object > User > Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 41 Configuration > Object > User > Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Default Setting
Default Authentication
Timeout Settings
These authentication timeout settings are used by default when you create a new
user account. They also control the settings for any existing user accounts that are
set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any user account’s
authentication timeout settings.
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can
modify the entry’s settings.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
User Type These are the kinds of user account the NWA1000 Series supports.
•admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the NWA1000
Series
•limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the NWA1000 Series but
not to change it
•user - this is used for embedded RADIUS server and SNMPv3 user access
Lease Time This is the default lease time in minutes for each type of user account. It defines the
number of minutes the user has to renew the current session before the user is
logged out.
Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web
Configurator.
Reauthentication Time This is the default reauthentication time in minutes for each type of user account. It
defines the number of minutes the user can be logged into the NWA1000 Series in
one session before having to log in again. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no
opportunity to renew the session without logging out.
Chapter 11 User
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
96
11.3.1 Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings
This screen allows you to set the default authentication timeout settings for the selected type of user
account. These default authentication timeout settings also control the settings for any existing user
accounts that are set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any user account’s
authentication timeout settings.
To access this screen, go to the Configuration > Object > User > Setting screen, select one of the Default
Authentication Timeout Settings entry and click the Edit icon.
Figure 61 User > Setting > Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings
User Logon Settings
Limit the number of
simultaneous logons for
administration account
Select this check box if you want to set a limit on the number of simultaneous logins
by admin users. If you do not select this, admin users can login as many times as they
want at the same time using the same or different IP addresses.
Maximum number per
administration account This field is effective when Limit ... for administration account is checked. Type the
maximum number of simultaneous logins by each admin user.
User Lockout Settings
Enable logon retry limit Select this check box to set a limit on the number of times each user can login
unsuccessfully (for example, wrong password) before the IP address is locked out for
a specified amount of time.
Maximum retry count This field is effective when Enable logon retry limit is checked. Type the maximum
number of times each user can login unsuccessfully before the IP address is locked
out for the specified lockout period. The number must be between 1 and 99.
Lockout period This field is effective when Enable logon retry limit is checked. Type the number of
minutes the user must wait to try to login again, if logon retry limit is enabled and the
maximum retry count is reached. This number must be between 1 and 65,535 (about
45.5 days).
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 41 Configuration > Object > User > Setting (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 User
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
97
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 42 User > Setting > Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Type This read-only field identifies the type of user account for which you are configuring the
default settings.
•admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the NWA1000 Series.
•limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the NWA1000 Series but not to
change it.
Lease Time Enter the number of minutes this type of user account has to renew the current session
before the user is logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make
the number of minutes unlimited.
Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator.
Access users can renew the session by clicking the Renew button on their screen. If you allow
access users to renew time automatically, the users can select this check box on their screen
as well. In this case, the session is automatically renewed before the lease time expires.
Reauthentication
Time
Type the number of minutes this type of user account can be logged into the NWA1000
Series in one session before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes.
You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no
opportunity to renew the session without logging out.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
98
CHAPTER 12
AP Profile
12.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure preset profiles for the NWA1000 Series.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Radio screen (Section 12.2 on page 99) creates radio configurations that can be used by the APs.
• The SSID screen (Section 12.3 on page 105) configures three different types of profiles for your
networked APs.
12.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Wireless Profiles
At the heart of all wireless AP configurations on the NWA1000 Series are profiles. A profile represents a
group of saved settings that you can use across any number of connected APs. You can set up the
following wireless profile types:
•Radio - This profile type defines the properties of an AP’s radio transmitter. You can have a maximum
of 32 radio profiles on the NWA1000 Series.
•SSID - This profile type defines the properties of a single wireless network signal broadcast by an AP.
Each radio on a single AP can broadcast up to 8 SSIDs. You can have a maximum of 32 SSID profiles
on the NWA1000 Series.
•Security - This profile type defines the security settings used by a single SSID. It controls the encryption
method required for a wireless client to associate itself with the SSID. You can have a maximum of 32
security profiles on the NWA1000 Series.
•MAC Filtering - This profile provides an additional layer of security for an SSID, allowing you to block
access or allow access to that SSID based on wireless client MAC addresses. If a client’s MAC address
is on the list, then it is either allowed or denied, depending on how you set up the MAC Filter profile.
You can have a maximum of 32 MAC filtering profiles on the NWA1000 Series.
•Layer-2 Isolation - This profile defines the MAC addresses of the devices that you want to allow the
associated wireless clients to have access to when layer-2 isolation is enabled.
SSID
The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) is the name that identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is
associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. In other
words, it is the name of the wireless network that clients use to connect to it.
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
99
WEP
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption scrambles all data packets transmitted between the AP and
the wireless stations associated with it in order to keep network communications private. Both the
wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key for data encryption and decryption.
WPA2
WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and
key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption
and user authentication.
IEEE 802.1x
The IEEE 802.1x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the authentication of wireless
stations and encryption key management. Authentication is done using an external RADIUS server.
12.2 Radio
This screen allows you to create radio profiles for the NWA1000 Series. A radio profile is a list of settings
that an NWA1000 Series can use to configure its radio transmitter(s). To access this screen click
Configuration > Object > AP Profile.
Note: You can have a maximum of 32 radio profiles on the NWA1000 Series.
Figure 62 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 43 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this to add a new radio profile.
Edit Click this to edit the selected radio profile.
Remove Click this to remove the selected radio profile.
Activate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
100
12.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile
This screen allows you to create a new radio profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click
the Add button or select a radio profile from the list and click the Edit button.
Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
Object
Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected radio profile.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
Status This field shows whether or not the entry is activated.
A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the radio profile.
Frequency Band This field indicates the frequency band which this radio profile is configured to use.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 43 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
101
Figure 63 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Hide / Show
Advanced Settings
Click this to hide or show the Advanced Settings in this window.
General Settings
Activate Select this option to make this profile active.
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
102
Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters to be used as this profile’s name. Spaces and
underscores are allowed.
802.11 Band Select the wireless band which this radio profile should use. Not all NWA1000 Seriess support
both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands.
2.4 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients.
5 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11ac/a/n wireless clients.
•11b/g: allows either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate
with the NWA1000 Series. The NWA1000 Series adjusts the transmission rate
automatically according to the wireless standard supported by the wireless devices.
•11b/g/n: allows IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to
associate with the NWA1000 Series. The transmission rate of your NWA1000 Series might
be reduced.
•11a: allows only IEEE 802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NWA1000
Series.
•11a/n: allows both IEEE802.11n and IEEE802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate
with the NWA1000 Series. The transmission rate of your NWA1000 Series might be
reduced.
•11ac: allows IEEE 802.11ac compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NWA1000
Series.
Channel Width Select the channel bandwidth you want to use for your wireless network.
Select 20 MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your
neighborhood.
Select 20/40 MHz to allow the NWA1000 Series to choose the channel bandwidth (20 or 40
MHz) that has least interference.
Select 20/40/80 MHz to allow the NWA1000 Series to choose the channel bandwidth (20 or
40 or 80 MHz) that has least interference. This option is available only when you select 11ac
in the 802.11 Band field.
Channel
Selection This is the radio channel which the signal will use for broadcasting by this radio profile.
•DCS: Choose Dynamic Channel Selection to have the NWA1000 Series choose a radio
channel that has least interference.
•Manual: Choose from the available radio channels in the list. If your NWA1000 Series is
outdoor type, be sure to choose non-indoors channels.
Enable DCS
Client Aware Select this to have the NWA1000 Series switch channels only when there are no clients
connected to it. If there is a client connected, the NWA1000 Series will not switch channels
but generate a log. The NWA1000 Series tries to scan and switch channels again at the end
of the specified time interval or at the scheduled time.
If you disable this then the NWA1000 Series switches channels immediately regardless of
any client connections. In this instance, clients that are connected to the NWA1000 Series
when it switches channels are dropped.
2.4 GHz Channel
Selection Method Select how you want to specify the channels the NWA1000 Series switches between for 2.4
GHz operation. This field appears only when you choose 802.11b/g/n mode.
Select auto to have the NWA1000 Series display a 2.4 GHz Channel Deployment field you
can use to limit channel switching to 3 or 4 channels.
Select manual to select the individual channels the NWA1000 Series switches between.
Note: The method is automatically set to auto when no channel is selected or
any one of the previously selected channels is not supported.
Channel ID This field is available only when you set Channel Selection to DCS and set 2.4 GHz Channel
Selection Method to manual.
Select the channels that you want the NWA1000 Series to use.
Table 44 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
103
2.4 GHz Channel
Deployment This is available when the 2.4 GHz Channel Selection Method is set to auto.
Select Three-Channel Deployment to limit channel switching to channels 1,6, and 11, the
three channels that are sufficiently attenuated to have almost no impact on one another.
In other words, this allows you to minimize channel interference by limiting channel-
hopping to these three “safe” channels.
Select Four-Channel Deployment to limit channel switching to four channels. Depending
on the country domain, if the only allowable channels are 1-11 then the NWA1000 Series
uses channels 1, 4, 7, 11 in this configuration; otherwise, the NWA1000 Series uses channels
1, 5, 9, 13 in this configuration. Four channel deployment expands your pool of possible
channels while keeping the channel interference to a minimum.
Enable 5 GHz DFS
Aware This field is available only when you select 11a, 11a/n or 11ac in the 802.11 Band field and
set 5 GHz Channel Selection Method to auto.
Select this if your APs are operating in an area known to have RADAR devices. This allows
the device to downgrade its frequency to below 5 GHz in the event RADAR signal is
detected, thus preventing it from interfering with that signal.
Enabling this forces the AP to select a non-DFS channel.
5 GHz Channel
Selection Method Select how you want to specify the channels the NWA1000 Series switches between for 5
GHz operation.
Select Auto to have the NWA1000 Series automatically select the best channel.
Select manual to select the individual channels the NWA1000 Series switches between.
Note: The method is automatically set to auto when no channel is selected or
any one of the previously selected channels is not supported.
Channel ID This field is available only when you set Channel Selection to DCS and set 5 GHz Channel
Selection Method to manual.
Select the channels that you want the NWA1000 Series to use.
Time Interval Select this option to have the NWA1000 Series survey the other APs within its broadcast
radius at the end of the specified time interval.
DCS Time Interval This field is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS and select the Time Interval
option.
Enter a number of minutes. This regulates how often the NWA1000 Series surveys the other
APs within its broadcast radius. If the channel on which it is currently broadcasting suddenly
comes into use by another AP, the NWA1000 Series will then dynamically select the next
available clean channel or a channel with lower interference.
Schedule Select this option to have the NWA1000 Series survey the other APs within its broadcast
radius at a specific time on selected days of the week.
Start Time Specify the time of the day (in 24-hour format) to have the NWA1000 Series use DCS to
automatically scan and find a less-used channel.
Week Days Select each day of the week to have the NWA1000 Series use DCS to automatically scan
and find a less-used channel.
Advanced Settings
Guard Interval Set the guard interval for this radio profile to either short or long. This option isn’t applicable
if you set 802.11 Band to 11a or 11b/g and/or choose 20 MHz channel width.
The guard interval is the gap introduced between data transmission from users in order to
reduce interference. Reducing the interval increases data transfer rates but also increases
interference. Increasing the interval reduces data transfer rates but also reduces
interference.
Table 44 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
104
Enable A-MPDU
Aggregation Select this to enable A-MPDU aggregation. This field is not available if you set 802.11 Band
to 11a or 11b/g.
Message Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames along with their
802.11n headers and wraps them in a 802.11n MAC header. This method is useful for
increasing bandwidth throughput in environments that are prone to high error rates.
Enable A-MSDU
Aggregation Select this to enable A-MSDU aggregation. This field is not available if you set 802.11 Band
to 11a or 11b/g.
Mac Service Data Unit (MSDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames without any of their
802.11n headers and wraps the header-less payload in a single 802.11n MAC header. This
method is useful for increasing bandwidth throughput. It is also more efficient than A-MPDU
except in environments that are prone to high error rates.
RTS/CTS Threshold Use RTS/CTS to reduce data collisions on the wireless network if you have wireless clients
that are associated with the same AP but out of range of one another. When enabled, a
wireless client sends an RTS (Request To Send) and then waits for a CTS (Clear To Send)
before it transmits. This stops wireless clients from transmitting packets at the same time
(and causing data collisions).
A wireless client sends an RTS for all packets larger than the number (of bytes) that you
enter here. Set the RTS/CTS equal to or higher than the fragmentation threshold to turn RTS/
CTS off.
Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval.
This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again. The interval tells
receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low-power mode before
waking up to handle the beacon. A high value helps save current consumption of the
access point.
DTIM Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and
multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Active Power Management
mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value
can be set from 1 to 255.
Enable Signal
Threshold Select the check box to use the signal threshold to ensure wireless clients receive good
throughput. This allows only wireless clients with a strong signal to connect to the AP.
Clear the check box to not require wireless clients to have a minimum signal strength to
connect to the AP.
Station Signal
Threshold Set a minimum client signal strength. A wireless client is allowed to connect to the AP only
when its signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold.
-20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -76 is the weakest.
Disassociate
Station Threshold Set a minimum kick-off signal strength. When a wireless client’s signal strength is lower than
the specified threshold, the NWA1000 Series disconnects the wireless client from the AP.
-20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -90 is the weakest.
Allow Station
Connection after
Multiple Retries
Select this option to allow a wireless client to try to associate with the AP again after it is
disconnected due to weak signal strength.
Station Retry
Count Set the maximum number of times a wireless client can attempt to re-connect to the AP
Allow 802.11n/ac
stations only Select this option to allow only 802.11 n/ac clients to connect, and reject 802.11a/b/g
clients.
Multicast Settings
Table 44 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
105
12.3 SSID
The SSID screens allow you to configure three different types of profiles for your networked APs: an SSID
list, which can assign specific SSID configurations to your APs; a security list, which can assign specific
encryption methods to the APs when allowing wireless clients to connect to them; and a MAC filter list,
which can limit connections to an AP based on wireless clients MAC addresses.
12.3.1 SSID List
This screen allows you to create and manage SSID configurations that can be used by the APs. An SSID,
or Service Set IDentifier, is basically the name of the wireless network to which a wireless client can
connect. The SSID appears as readable text to any device capable of scanning for wireless frequencies
(such as the WiFi adapter in a laptop), and is displayed as the wireless network name when a person
makes a connection to it.
To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List.
Note: You cannot add or remove an SSID profile after running the setup wizard.
Figure 64 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List (Default)
Transmission
Mode Specify how the NWA1000 Series handles wireless multicast traffic.
Select Multicast to Unicast to broadcast wireless multicast traffic to all of the wireless clients
as unicast traffic. Unicast traffic dynamically changes the data rate based on the
application’s bandwidth requirements. The retransmit mechanism of unicast traffic
provides more reliable transmission of the multicast traffic, although it also produces
duplicate packets.
Select Fixed Multicast Rate to send multicast traffic to all wireless clients at a single data
rate. You must know the multicast application’s bandwidth requirements and set it in the
following field.
Multicast
Rate(Mbps) If you set Transmission Mode to Fixed Multicast Rate, select a data rate at which the
NWA1000 Series transmits multicast packets to wireless clients. For example, to deploy 4
Mbps video, select a fixed multicast rate higher than 4 Mbps.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.
Table 44 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
106
Figure 65 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List (After wizard setup)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
12.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile
This screen allows you to create a new SSID profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the
Add button or select a SSID profile from the list and click the Edit button.
Table 45 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this to add a new SSID profile.
This button is not available after you configure the NWA1000 Series using the wizard.
Edit Click this to edit the selected SSID profile.
Remove Click this to remove the selected SSID profile.
This button is not available after you configure the NWA1000 Series using the wizard.
Object
Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected SSID profile (for example, radio
profile).
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the SSID profile.
SSID This field indicates the SSID name as it appears to wireless clients.
Security Profile This field indicates which (if any) security profile is associated with the SSID profile.
QoS This field indicates the QoS type associated with the SSID profile.
MAC Filtering
Profile
This field indicates which (if any) MAC filter Profile is associated with the SSID profile.
Layer-2 Isolation
Profile
This field indicates which (if any) layer-2 isolation Profile is associated with the SSID profile.
VLAN ID This field indicates the VLAN ID associated with the SSID profile.
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
107
Figure 66 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit SSID Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit SSID Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Create new
Object
Select an object type from the list to create a new one associated with this SSID profile.
Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the
Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are
allowed.
SSID Enter the SSID name for this profile. This is the name visible on the network to wireless clients.
Enter up to 32 characters, spaces and underscores are allowed.
Security Profile Select a security profile from this list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use the
Create new Object menu to create one.
Note: It is highly recommended that you create security profiles for all of your SSIDs to
enhance your network security.
MAC Filtering
Profile
Select a MAC filtering profile from the list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use
the Create new Object menu to create one.
MAC filtering allows you to limit the wireless clients connecting to your network through a
particular SSID by wireless client MAC addresses. Any clients that have MAC addresses not in
the MAC filtering profile of allowed addresses are denied connections.
The disable setting means no MAC filtering is used.
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
108
Layer-2 Isolation
Profile
Select a layer-2 isolation profile from the list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use
the Create new Object menu to create one.
Layer-2 isolation allows you to prevent wireless clients associated with your NWA1000 Series
from communicating with other wireless clients, APs, computers or routers in a network.
The disable setting means no layer-2 isolation is used.
QoS Select a Quality of Service (QoS) access category to associate with this SSID. Access categories
minimize the delay of data packets across a wireless network. Certain categories, such as
video or voice, are given a higher priority due to the time sensitive nature of their data packets.
QoS access categories are as follows:
disable: Turns off QoS for this SSID. All data packets are treated equally and not tagged with
access categories.
WMM: Enables automatic tagging of data packets. The NWA1000 Series assigns access
categories to the SSID by examining data as it passes through it and making a best guess effort.
If something looks like video traffic, for instance, it is tagged as such.
WMM_VOICE: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as voice data. This is recommended if an
SSID is used for activities like placing and receiving VoIP phone calls.
WMM_VIDEO: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as video data. This is recommended for
activities like video conferencing.
WMM_BEST_EFFORT: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as “best effort,” meaning the data
travels the best route it can without displacing higher priority traffic. This is good for activities
that do not require the best bandwidth throughput, such as surfing the Internet.
WMM_BACKGROUND: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as low priority or “background
traffic”, meaning all other access categories take precedence over this one. If traffic from an
SSID does not have strict throughput requirements, then this access category is recommended.
For example, an SSID that only has network printers connected to it.
Rate Limiting
Downlink Define the maximum incoming transmission data rate (either in mbps or kbps) on a perstation
basis.
Uplink Define the maximum outgoing transmission data rate (either in mbps or kbps) on a perstation
basis.
VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID for the NWA1000 Series to use to tag traffic originating from this SSID.
Hidden SSID Select this if you want to “hide” your SSID from wireless clients. This tells any wireless clients in the
vicinity of the AP using this SSID profile not to display its SSID name as a potential connection.
Not all wireless clients respect this flag and display it anyway.
When a SSID is “hidden” and a wireless client cannot see it, the only way you can connect to
the SSID is by manually entering the SSID name in your wireless connection setup screen(s)
(these vary by client, client connectivity software, and operating system).
Enable Intra-BSS
Traffic Blocking
Select this option to prevent crossover traffic from within the same SSID on the NWA1000 Series.
Enable U-APSD Select this option to enable Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery (U-APSD), which is
also known as WMM-Power Save. This helps increase battery life for battery-powered wireless
clients connected to the NWA1000 Series using this SSID profile.
Enable Proxy ARP The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an IP address to a MAC
address. An ARP broadcast is sent to all devices in the same Ethernet network to request the
MAC address of a target IP address.
Select this option to allow the NWA1000 Series to answer ARP requests for an IP address on
behalf of a client associated with this SSID. This can reduce broadcast traffic and improve
network performance.
Table 46 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit SSID Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
109
12.4 Security List
This screen allows you to manage wireless security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs.
Wireless security is implemented strictly between the AP broadcasting the SSID and the stations that are
connected to it.
To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List.
Note: You can have a maximum of 32 security profiles on the NWA1000 Series.
Figure 67 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
12.4.1 Add/Edit Security Profile
This screen allows you to create a new security profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click
the Add button or select a security profile from the list and click the Edit button.
Schedule SSID Select this option and set whether the SSID is enabled or disabled on each day of the week.
You also need to select the hour and minute (in 24-hour format) to specify the time period of
each day during which the SSID is enabled/enabled.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.
Table 46 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit SSID Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 47 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this to add a new security profile.
Edit Click this to edit the selected security profile.
Remove Click this to remove the selected security profile.
Object
Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected security profile (for example,
SSID profile).
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the security profile.
Security Mode This field indicates this profile’s security mode (if any).
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
110
Note: This screen’s options change based on the Security Mode selected. Only the default
screen is displayed here.
Figure 68 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
111
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the
Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are
allowed.
Security Mode Select a security mode from the list: none, wep, wpa2, or wpa2-mix.
Radius Server Type This shows External and the NWA1000 Series uses an external RADIUS server for
authentication.
Primary / Secondary
Radius Server
Activate
Select this to have the NWA1000 Series use the specified RADIUS server.
Radius Server IP
Address Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.
Radius Server
Port Enter the port number of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.
Radius Server
Secret Enter the shared secret password of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.
Primary / Secondary
Accounting Server
Activate
Select the check box to enable user accounting through an external authentication server.
Accounting
Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
Accounting
Server Port Enter the port number of the external accounting server. The default port number is 1813.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with
additional information.
Accounting
Share Secret Enter a password (up to 128 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
external accounting server and the NWA1000 Series. The key must be the same on the
external accounting server and your NWA1000 Series. The key is not sent over the network.
Accounting Interim
Update
This field is available only when you enable user accounting through an external
authentication server.
Select this to have the NWA1000 Series send subscriber status updates to the accounting
server at the interval you specify.
Interim Update
Interval Specify the time interval for how often the NWA1000 Series is to send a subscriber status
update to the accounting server.
General Server
Settings
NAS IP Address If the RADIUS server requires the NWA1000 Series to provide the NAS (Network Access Server)
IP address attribute, enter it here.
NAS Identifier If the RADIUS server requires the NWA1000 Series to provide the NAS (Network Access Server)
identifier attribute, enter it here. The NAS identifier is to identify the source of access request.
It could be the NAS’s fully qualified domain name.
802.1X Select this to enable 802.1x secure authentication.
ReAuthenticatio
n Timer Enter the interval (in seconds) between authentication requests. Enter a 0 for unlimited
requests.
WEP Authentication Settings
Idle Timeout Enter the idle interval (in seconds) that a client can be idle before authentication is
discontinued.
Authentication Type Select a WEP authentication method. Choices are Open or Share key. Share key is only
available if you are not using 802.1x.
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
112
Key Length Select the bit-length of the encryption key to be used in WEP connections.
If you select WEP-64:
• Enter 10 hexadecimal digits in the range of “A-F”, “a-f” and “0-9” (for example,
0x11AA22BB33) for each Key used.
or
• Enter 5 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from “a-z”, “A-Z” and “0-9” (for
example, MyKey) for each Key used.
If you select WEP-128:
• Enter 26 hexadecimal digits in the range of “A-F”, “a-f” and “0-9” (for example,
0x00112233445566778899AABBCC) for each Key used.
or
• Enter 13 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from “a-z”, “A-Z” and “0-9” (for
example, MyKey12345678) for each Key used.
Key 1~4 Based on your Key Length selection, enter the appropriate length hexadecimal or ASCII key.
WPA2/WPA2-Mix Authentication Settings
PSK This field is available when you select the wpa2, or wpa2-mix security mode.
Select this option to use a Pre-Shared Key with WPA2 encryption.
Pre-Shared Key Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including
spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters.
Cipher Type Select an encryption cipher type from the list.
•auto - This automatically chooses the best available cipher based on the cipher in use
by the wireless client that is attempting to make a connection.
•aes - This is the Advanced Encryption Standard encryption method. It is a more recent
development over TKIP and considerably more robust. Not all wireless clients may
support this.
Idle Timeout Enter the interval (in seconds) that a client can be idle before authentication is
discontinued.
Group Key Update
Timer
Enter the interval (in seconds) at which the AP updates the group WPA2 encryption key.
Management
Frame Protection
This field is available only when you select wpa2 in the Security Mode field and set Cipher
Type to aes.
Data frames in 802.11 WLANs can be encrypted and authenticated with WEP, WPA or
WPA2. But 802.11 management frames, such as beacon/probe response, association
request, association response, de-authentication and disassociation are always
unauthenticated and unencrypted. IEEE 802.11w Protected Management Frames allows
APs to use the existing security mechanisms (encryption and authentication methods
defined in IEEE 802.11i WPA/WPA2) to protect management frames. This helps prevent
wireless DoS attacks.
Select the check box to enable management frame protection (MFP) to add security to
802.11 management frames.
Select Optional if you do not require the wireless clients to support MFP. Management
frames will be encrypted if the clients support MFP.
Select Required and wireless clients must support MFP in order to join the NWA1000 Series’s
wireless network.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.
Table 48 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
113
12.5 MAC Filter List
This screen allows you to create and manage security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs. To
access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List.
Note: You can have a maximum of 32 MAC filtering profiles on the NWA1000 Series.
Figure 69 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
12.5.1 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile
This screen allows you to create a new MAC filtering profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen,
click the Add button or select a MAC filter profile from the list and click the Edit button.
Note: Each MAC filtering profile can include a maximum of 512 MAC addresses.
Table 49 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this to add a new MAC filtering profile.
Edit Click this to edit the selected MAC filtering profile.
Remove Click this to remove the selected MAC filtering profile.
Object
Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected MAC filtering profile (for
example, SSID profile).
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the MAC filtering profile.
Filter Action This field indicates this profile’s filter action (if any).
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
114
Figure 70 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
12.6 Layer-2 Isolation List
Layer-2 isolation is used to prevent wireless clients associated with your NWA1000 Series from
communicating with other wireless clients, APs, computers or routers in a network.
In the following example, layer-2 isolation is enabled on the NWA1000 Series to allow a guest wireless
client (A) to access the main network router (B). The router provides access to the Internet and the
network printer (C) while preventing the client from accessing other computers and servers on the
network. The client can communicate with other wireless clients only if Intra-BSS Traffic blocking is
disabled.
Table 50 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the
Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are
allowed.
Filter Action Select allow to permit the wireless client with the MAC addresses in this profile to connect to the
network through the associated SSID; select deny to block the wireless clients with the specified
MAC addresses.
Add Click this to add a MAC address to the profile’s list.
Edit Click this to edit the selected MAC address in the profile’s list.
Remove Click this to remove the selected MAC address from the profile’s list.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
MAC This field specifies a MAC address associated with this profile. You can click the MAC address to
make it editable.
Description This field displays a description for the MAC address associated with this profile. You can click
the description to make it editable. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores
allowed.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
115
Note: Intra-BSS Traffic Blocking is activated when you enable layer-2 isolation.
Figure 71 Layer-2 Isolation Application
MAC addresses that are not listed in the layer-2 isolation table are blocked from communicating with
the NWA1000 Series’s wireless clients except for broadcast packets. Layer-2 isolation does not check the
traffic between wireless clients that are associated with the same AP. Intra-BSS traffic allows wireless
clients associated with the same AP to communicate with each other.
This screen allows you to specify devices you want the users on your wireless networks to access. To
access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List.
Figure 72 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 51 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this to add a new MAC filtering profile.
Edit Click this to edit the selected MAC filtering profile.
Remove Click this to remove the selected MAC filtering profile.
Object
Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected MAC filtering profile (for
example, SSID profile).
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the layer-2 isolation profile.
Chapter 12 AP Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
116
12.6.1 Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile
This screen allows you to create a new layer-2 isolation profile or edit an existing one. To access this
screen, click the Add button or select a layer-2 isolation profile from the list and click the Edit button.
Note: You need to know the MAC address of each wireless client, AP, computer or router that
you want to allow to communicate with the NWA1000 Series's wireless clients.
Figure 73 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List > Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation
Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List > Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation
Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the
Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are
allowed.
Add Click this to add a MAC address to the profile’s list.
Edit Click this to edit the selected MAC address in the profile’s list.
Remove Click this to remove the selected MAC address from the profile’s list.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
MAC This field specifies a MAC address associated with this profile. You can click the MAC address to
make it editable.
Description This field displays a description for the MAC address associated with this profile. You can click
the description to make it editable. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores
allowed.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
117
CHAPTER 13
WDS Profile
13.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure WDS (Wireless Distribution System) profiles for the NWA1000
Series to form a WDS with other APs.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The WDS Profile screen (Section 13.2 on page 117) creates preset WDS configurations that can be used
by the NWA1000 Series.
13.2 WDS Profile
This screen allows you to manage and create WDS profiles that can be used by the APs. To access this
screen, click Configuration > Object > WDS Profile.
Figure 74 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 53 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this to add a new profile.
Edit Click this to edit the selected profile.
Remove Click this to remove the selected profile.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile.
Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the profile.
WDS SSID This field shows the SSID specified in this WDS profile.
Chapter 13 WDS Profile
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
118
13.2.1 Add/Edit WDS Profile
This screen allows you to create a new WDS profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the
Add button or select and existing profile and click the Edit button.
Figure 75 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile > Add/Edit WDS Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile > Add/Edit WDS Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name.
WDS SSID Enter the SSID with which you want the NWA1000 Series to connect to a root AP or repeater
to form a WDS.
Pre-Shared Key Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including
spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters.
The key is used to encrypt the traffic between the APs.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
119
CHAPTER 14
Certificates
14.1 Overview
The NWA1000 Series can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are
based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public key.
Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The My Certifica tes screens (Section 14.2 on page 122) generate and export self-signed certificates or
certification requests and import the NWA1000 Series’s CA-signed certificates.
• The Trusted Certificates screens (Section 14.3 on page 129) save CA certificates and trusted remote
host certificates to the NWA1000 Series. The NWA1000 Series trusts any valid certificate that you have
imported as a trusted certificate. It also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the certificates
that you have imported as a trusted certificate.
14.1.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
When using public-key cryptology for authentication, each host has two keys. One key is public and can
be made openly available. The other key is private and must be kept secure.
These keys work like a handwritten signature (in fact, certificates are often referred to as “digital
signatures”). Only you can write your signature exactly as it should look. When people know what your
signature looks like, they can verify whether something was signed by you, or by someone else. In the
same way, your private key “writes” your digital signature and your public key allows people to verify
whether data was signed by you, or by someone else.
This process works as follows:
1Tim wants to send a message to Jenny. He needs her to be sure that it comes from him, and that the
message content has not been altered by anyone else along the way. Tim generates a public key pair
(one public key and one private key).
2Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available. This means that anyone who
receives a message seeming to come from Tim can read it and verify whether it is really from him or not.
3Tim uses his private key to sign the message and sends it to Jenny.
4Jenny receives the message and uses Tim’s public key to verify it. Jenny knows that the message is from
Tim, and that although other people may have been able to read the message, no-one can have
altered it (because they cannot re-sign the message with Tim’s private key).
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
120
5Additionally, Jenny uses her own private key to sign a message and Tim uses Jenny’s public key to verify
the message.
The NWA1000 Series uses certificates based on public-key cryptology to authenticate users attempting
to establish a connection, not to encrypt the data that you send after establishing a connection. The
method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the
type of connection.
The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification
authority’s public key to verify the certificates.
A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate. The
NWA1000 Series does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked.
Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates. A
directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL
(Certificate Revocation List). The NWA1000 Series can check a peer’s certificate against a directory
server’s list of revoked certificates. The framework of servers, software, procedures and policies that
handles keys is called PKI (public-key infrastructure).
Advantages of Certificates
Certificates offer the following benefits.
• The NWA1000 Series only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to
trust, no matter how many devices you need to authenticate.
• Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never
need to transmit private keys.
Self-signed Certificates
You can have the NWA1000 Series act as a certification authority and sign its own certificates.
Factory Default Certificate
The NWA1000 Series generates its own unique self-signed certificate when you first turn it on. This
certificate is referred to in the GUI as the factory default certificate.
Certificate File Formats
Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:
• Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters, uppercase
letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.
• Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital signatures)
that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The private key is not
included. The NWA1000 Series currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single
certificate.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase letters,
uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form.
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
121
• Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates.The private key
in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The file’s password is not connected to
your certificate’s public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must
provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the NWA1000 Series.
Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this
to occur since many programs use text files by default.
14.1.3 Verifying a Certificate
Before you import a trusted certificate into the NWA1000 Series, you should verify that you have the
correct certificate. You can do this using the certificate’s fingerprint. A certificate’s fingerprint is a
message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithm. The following procedure describes how to
check a certificate’s fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate.
1Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer.
2Make sure that the certificate has a “.cer” or “.crt” file name extension.
3Double-click the certificate’s icon to open the Certificate window. Click the Details tab and scroll down
to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields.
4Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint
Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. The secure method may vary based on your situation. Possible
examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection.
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
122
14.2 My Certificates
Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates to open this screen. This is the NWA1000
Series’s summary list of certificates and certification requests.
Figure 76 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PKI Storage Space
in Use
This bar displays the percentage of the NWA1000 Series’s PKI storage space that is currently in
use. When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or
unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.
Add Click this to go to the screen where you can have the NWA1000 Series generate a certificate
or a certification request.
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of
information about the certificate.
Remove The NWA1000 Series keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them.
Uploading a new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To
remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The NWA1000 Series confirms you want to
remove it before doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this
action.
Object Reference You cannot delete certificates that any of the NWA1000 Series’s features are configured to
use. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings
use the entry.
# This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.
Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give
each certificate a unique name.
Type This field displays what kind of certificate this is.
REQ represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send a certification
request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the My Certificate
Import screen to import the certificate and replace the request.
SELF represents a self-signed certificate.
CERT represents a certificate issued by a certification authority.
Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common
Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C
(Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
123
14.2.1 Add My Certificates
Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates and then the Add icon to open the Add My
Certificates screen. Use this screen to have the NWA1000 Series create a self-signed certificate, enroll a
certificate with a certification authority or generate a certification request.
Figure 77 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add
Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority,
such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and
country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field.
Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an
Expired! message if the certificate has expired.
Import Click Import to open a screen where you can save a certificate to the NWA1000 Series.
Refresh Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates.
Table 55 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
124
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a name to identify this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and
;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=- characters.
Subject Information Use these fields to record information that identifies the owner of the certificate. You do
not have to fill in every field, although you must specify a Host IP Address, Host Domain
Name, or E-Mail. The certification authority may add fields (such as a serial number) to the
subject information when it issues a certificate. It is recommended that each certificate
have unique subject information.
Select a radio button to identify the certificate’s owner by IP address, domain name or e-
mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail
address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification
purposes only and can be any string.
A domain name can be up to 255 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the
hyphen and periods.
An e-mail address can be up to 63 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the
hyphen, the @ symbol, periods and the underscore.
Organizational Unit Identify the organizational unit or department to which the certificate owner belongs. You
can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the
underscore.
Organization Identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use up to
31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
Town (City) Identify the town or city where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31
characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
State (Province) Identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31
characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
Country Identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31
characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
Key Type The NWA1000 Series uses the RSA (Rivest, Shamir and Adleman) public-key encryption
algorithm. SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) and SHA2 are hash algorithms used to
authenticate packet data. SHA2-256 or SHA2-512 are part of the SHA2 set of
cryptographic functions and they are considered even more secure than SHA1.
Select a key type from RSA-SHA256 and RSA-SHA512.
Key Length Select a number from the drop-down list box to determine how many bits the key should
use (1024 to 2048). The longer the key, the more secure it is. A longer key also uses more PKI
storage space.
Extended Key Usage Select Server Authentication to allow a web server to send clients the certificate to
authenticate itself.
Select Client Authentication to use the certificate’s key to authenticate clients to the
secure gateway.
These radio buttons deal with how and when the certificate is to be generated.
Create a self-signed
certificate
Select this to have the NWA1000 Series generate the certificate and act as the
Certification Authority (CA) itself. This way you do not need to apply to a certification
authority for certificates.
Create a certification
request and save it
locally for later
manual enrollment
Select this to have the NWA1000 Series generate and store a request for a certificate. Use
the My Certificate Edit screen to view the certification request and copy it to send to the
certification authority.
Copy the certification request from the My Certificate Edit screen and then send it to the
certification authority.
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
125
If you configured the Add My Certificates screen to have the NWA1000 Series enroll a certificate and the
certificate enrollment is not successful, you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the
Add My Certificates screen. Click Return and check your information in the Add My Certificates screen.
Make sure that the certification authority information is correct and that your Internet connection is
working properly if you want the NWA1000 Series to enroll a certificate online.
14.2.2 Edit My Certificates
Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates and then the Edit icon to open the My
Certificate Edit screen. You can use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and change the
certificate’s name.
Create a certification
request and enroll for
a certificate
immediately online
Select this to have the NWA1000 Series generate a request for a certificate and apply to a
certification authority for a certificate.
You must have the certification authority’s certificate already imported in the Trusted
Certificates screen.
When you select this option, you must select the certification authority’s enrollment
protocol and the certification authority’s certificate from the drop-down list boxes and
enter the certification authority’s server address. You also need to fill in the Reference
Number and Key if the certification authority requires them.
Enrollment Protocol This field applies when you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate
immediately online. Select the certification authority’s enrollment protocol from the drop-
down list box.
Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that was
developed by VeriSign and Cisco.
Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that was
developed by the Public Key Infrastructure X.509 working group of the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF) and is specified in RFC 2510.
CA Server Address This field applies when you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate
immediately online. Enter the IP address (or URL) of the certification authority server.
For a URL, you can use up to 511 of the following characters. a-zA-Z0-9'()+,/:.=?;!*#@$_%-
CA Certificate This field applies when you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate
immediately online. Select the certification authority’s certificate from the CA Certificate
drop-down list box.
You must have the certification authority’s certificate already imported in the Trusted
Certificates screen. Click Trusted CAs to go to the Trusted Certificates screen where you
can view (and manage) the NWA1000 Series's list of certificates of trusted certification
authorities.
Request
Authentication
When you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately
online, the certification authority may want you to include a reference number and key to
identify you when you send a certification request.
Fill in both the Reference Number and the Key fields if your certification authority uses the
CMP enrollment protocol. Just the Key field displays if your certification authority uses the
SCEP enrollment protocol.
For the reference number, use 0 to 99999999.
For the key, use up to 31 of the following characters. a-zA-Z0-9;|`~!@#$%^&*()_+\{}':,./
<>=-
OK Click OK to begin certificate or certification request generation.
Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.
Table 56 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
126
Figure 78 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
127
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric
and ;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=- characters.
Certification Path This field displays for a certificate, not a certification request.
Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the hierarchy of certification
authorities that validate the certificate (and the certificate itself).
If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification
authority, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the certificate itself).
If the certificate is a self-signed certificate, the certificate itself is the only one in the list. The
NWA1000 Series does not trust the certificate and displays “Not trusted” in this field if any
certificate on the path has expired or been revoked.
Refresh Click Refresh to display the certification path.
Certificate
Information
These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a
Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificate’s owner
signed the certificate (not a certification authority). “X.509” means that this certificate was
created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats
for public-key certificates.
Version This field displays the X.509 version number. “
Serial Number This field displays the certificate’s identification number given by the certification authority
or generated by the NWA1000 Series.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common
Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O), State (ST), and Country (C).
Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority,
such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country.
With self-signed certificates, this is the same as the Subject Name field.
“none” displays for a certification request.
Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate.
Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. “none” displays for a
certification request.
Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes
an Expired! message if the certificate has expired. “none” displays for a certification
request.
Key Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate’s key pair
(the NWA1000 Series uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for
example).
Subject Alternative
Name
This field displays the certificate owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail
address (EMAIL).
Key Usage This field displays for what functions the certificate’s key can be used. For example,
“DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and
“KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.
Extended Key Usage This field displays for what EKU (Extended Key Usage) functions the certificate’s key can be
used.
Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA
means that this is a certification authority’s certificate and “Path Length Constraint=1”
means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate’s path. This field
does not display for a certification request.
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
128
14.2.3 Import Certificates
Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import to open the My Certificate Import
screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the NWA1000 Series.
Note: You can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that
was generated by the NWA1000 Series. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12
format, including the certificate’s public and private keys.
The certificate you import replaces the corresponding request in the My Certificates screen.
You must remove any spaces in the certificate’s filename before you can import it.
MD5 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the NWA1000 Series calculated using the MD5
algorithm.
SHA1 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the NWA1000 Series calculated using the SHA1
algorithm.
Certificate in PEM
(Base-64) Encoded
Format
This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a
binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste a certification request into a certification authority’s web page,
an e-mail that you send to the certification authority or a text editor and save the file on a
management computer for later manual enrollment.
You can copy and paste a certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you
can copy and paste a certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management
computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Export Certificate
Only
Use this button to save a copy of the certificate without its private key. Click this button and
then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location
that you want to use and click Save.
Password If you want to export the certificate with its private key, create a password and type it here.
Make sure you keep this password in a safe place. You will need to use it if you import the
certificate to another device.
Export Certificate
with Private Key
Use this button to save a copy of the certificate with its private key. Type the certificate’s
password and click this button. Click Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen
opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series. You can only change the
name.
Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.
Table 57 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
129
Figure 79 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
14.3 Trusted Certificates
Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates to open the Trusted Certificates screen.
This screen displays a summary list of certificates that you have set the NWA1000 Series to accept as
trusted. The NWA1000 Series also accepts any valid certificate signed by a certificate on this list as being
trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certificates.
Table 58 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import
LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.
You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the NWA1000
Series.
Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload.
Password This field only applies when you import a binary PKCS#12 format file. Type the file’s password that was
created when the PKCS #12 file was exported.
OK Click OK to save the certificate on the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
130
Figure 80 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
14.3.1 Edit Trusted Certificates
Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certifica tes and then a certificate’s Edit icon to open
the Trusted Certificates Edit screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certificate,
change the certificate’s name and set whether or not you want the NWA1000 Series to check a
Table 59 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PKI Storage
Space in Use
This bar displays the percentage of the NWA1000 Series’s PKI storage space that is currently in
use. When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary
certificates before adding more certificates.
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of
information about the certificate.
Remove The NWA1000 Series keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading
a new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove an
entry, select it and click Remove. The NWA1000 Series confirms you want to remove it before
doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.
Object
Reference
You cannot delete certificates that any of the NWA1000 Series’s features are configured to use.
Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the
entry.
# This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.
Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common
Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C
(Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority,
such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and
country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field.
Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an
Expired! message if the certificate has expired.
Import Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority
that you trust, from your computer to the NWA1000 Series.
Refresh Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates.
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
131
certification authority’s list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification
authority.
Figure 81 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
132
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 60 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can change the name. You
can use up to 31 alphanumeric and ;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=- characters.
Certification Path Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the end entity’s certificate
and a list of certification authority certificates that shows the hierarchy of certification
authorities that validate the end entity’s certificate. If the issuing certification authority is one
that you have imported as a trusted certificate, it may be the only certification authority in
the list (along with the end entity’s own certificate). The NWA1000 Series does not trust the
end entity’s certificate and displays “Not trusted” in this field if any certificate on the path
has expired or been revoked.
Refresh Click Refresh to display the certification path.
Enable X.509v3 CRL
Distribution Points
and OCSP checking
Select this check box to have the NWA1000 Series check incoming certificates that are
signed by this certificate against a Certificate Revocation List (CRL) or an OCSP server. You
also need to configure the OSCP or LDAP server details.
OCSP Server Select this check box if the directory server uses OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol).
URL Type the protocol, IP address and pathname of the OCSP server.
ID The NWA1000 Series may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the OCSP server. Type
the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the server (usually a
certification authority).
Password Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the OCSP server
(usually a certification authority).
LDAP Server Select this check box if the directory server uses LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol). LDAP is a protocol over TCP that specifies how clients access directories of
certificates and lists of revoked certificates.
Address Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) of the directory server.
Port Use this field to specify the LDAP server port number. You must use the same server port
number that the directory server uses. 389 is the default server port number for LDAP.
ID The NWA1000 Series may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the CRL directory
server. Type the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the
server (usually a certification authority).
Password Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the CRL directory
server (usually a certification authority).
Certificate
Information
These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a
Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificate’s owner
signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was
created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats
for public-key certificates.
Version This field displays the X.509 version number.
Serial Number This field displays the certificate’s identification number given by the certification authority.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common
Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C).
Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority,
such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country.
With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject Name field.
Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. Some
certification authorities use rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and
the SHA1 hash algorithm). Other certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5 (RSA
public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm).
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
133
14.3.2 Import Trusted Certificates
Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import to open the Import Trusted
Certificates screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted certificate to the NWA1000
Series.
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import the
certificate.
Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red
and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.
Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes
an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.
Key Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate’s key pair
(the NWA1000 Series uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for
example).
Subject Alternative
Name
This field displays the certificate’s owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail
address (EMAIL).
Key Usage This field displays for what functions the certificate’s key can be used. For example,
“DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and
“KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.
Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA
means that this is a certification authority’s certificate and “Path Length Constraint=1”
means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate’s path.
MD5 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the NWA1000 Series calculated using the MD5
algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for
example) that this is actually their certificate.
SHA1 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the NWA1000 Series calculated using the SHA1
algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for
example) that this is actually their certificate.
Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a
binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or
you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a
management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Export Certificate Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens,
browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series. You can only change the
name.
Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted Certificates screen.
Table 60 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
134
Figure 82 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
14.4 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the features described in this
chapter.
OCSP
OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) allows an application or device to check whether a certificate
is valid. With OCSP the NWA1000 Series checks the status of individual certificates instead of
downloading a Certificate Revocation List (CRL). OCSP has two main advantages over a CRL. The first is
real-time status information. The second is a reduction in network traffic since the NWA1000 Series only
gets information on the certificates that it needs to verify, not a huge list. When the NWA1000 Series
requests certificate status information, the OCSP server returns a “expired”, “current” or “unknown”
response.
Table 61 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import
LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.
You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the NWA1000
Series.
Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload.
OK Click OK to save the certificate on the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the previous screen.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
135
CHAPTER 15
System
15.1 Overview
Use the system screens to configure general NWA1000 Series settings.
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Host Name screen (Section 15.2 on page 135) configures a unique name for the NWA1000 Series
in your network.
• The Date/Time screen (Section 15.3 on page 136) configures the date and time for the NWA1000
Series.
• The WWW screens (Section 15.4 on page 140) configure settings for HTTP or HTTPS access to the
NWA1000 Series.
• The SSH screen (Section 15.5 on page 148) configures SSH (Secure SHell) for securely accessing the
NWA1000 Series’s command line interface.
• The Telnet screen (Section 15.6 on page 152) configures Telnet for accessing the NWA1000 Series’s
command line interface.
•The FTP screen (Section 15.7 on page 153) specifies FTP server settings. You can upload and
download the NWA1000 Series’s firmware and configuration files using FTP. Please also see Chapter 17
on page 170 for more information about firmware and configuration files.
• The SNMP screens (Section 15.8 on page 154) configure the device’s SNMP settings, including profiles
that define allowed SNMPv3 access.
15.2 Host Name
A host name is the unique name by which a device is known on a network. Click Configuration > System
> Host Name to open this screen.
Figure 83 Configuration > System > Host Name
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
136
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
15.3 Date and Time
For effective scheduling and logging, the NWA1000 Series system time must be accurate. The NWA1000
Series has a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an
external server.
To change your NWA1000 Series’s time based on your local time zone and date, click Configuration >
System > Date/Time. The screen displays as shown. You can manually set the NWA1000 Series’s time and
date or have the NWA1000 Series get the date and time from a time server.
Table 62 Configuration > System > Host Name
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name Choose a descriptive name to identify your NWA1000 Series device. This name can be up to 64
alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes (-) underscores (_) and
periods (.) are accepted.
System Location Specify the name of the place where the NWA1000 Series is located. You can enter up to 60
alphanumeric and '()’ ,:;?! +-*/= #$%@ characters. Spaces and underscores are allowed. The
name should start with a letter.
Domain Name Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. This name is propagated to DHCP clients
connected to interfaces with the DHCP server enabled. This name can be up to 254
alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes “-” are accepted.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
137
Figure 84 Configuration > System > Date/Time
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 63 Configuration > System > Date/Time
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current Time and
Date
Current Time This field displays the present time of your NWA1000 Series.
Current Date This field displays the present date of your NWA1000 Series.
Time and Date
Setup
Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time
and date, time zone and daylight saving at the same time, the time zone and daylight
saving will affect the new time and date you entered. When you enter the time settings
manually, the NWA1000 Series uses the new setting once you click Apply.
New Time
(hh:mm:ss)
This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured
manually.
When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click
Apply.
New Date
(yyyy-mm-dd)
This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured
manually.
When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click
Apply.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
138
Get from Time
Server
Select this radio button to have the NWA1000 Series get the time and date from the time
server you specify below. The NWA1000 Series requests time and date settings from the time
server under the following circumstances.
• When the NWA1000 Series starts up.
• When you click Apply or Sync. Now in this screen.
• 24-hour intervals after starting up.
Time Server Address Enter the IP address or URL of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if
you are unsure of this information.
Sync. Now Click this button to have the NWA1000 Series get the time and date from a time server (see
the Time Server Address field). This also saves your changes (except the daylight saving
settings).
Time Zone Setup
Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time
zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Enable Daylight
Saving
Daylight saving is a period from late spring to fall when many countries set their clocks
ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight
Saving. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of
March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local
time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the at
field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time
zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M.
GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you
type in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2
because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight
Saving. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time
zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the
United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the at field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the
time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1
A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The
time you type in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would
type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Offset Specify how much the clock changes when daylight saving begins and ends.
Enter a number from 1 to 5.5 (by 0.5 increments).
For example, if you set this field to 3.5, a log occurred at 6 P.M. in local official time will
appear as if it had occurred at 10:30 P.M.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 63 Configuration > System > Date/Time (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
139
15.3.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List
When you turn on the NWA1000 Series for the first time, the date and time start at 2003-01-01 00:00:00.
The NWA1000 Series then attempts to synchronize with one of the following pre-defined list of Network
Time Protocol (NTP) time servers.
The NWA1000 Series continues to use the following pre-defined list of NTP time servers if you do not
specify a time server or it cannot synchronize with the time server you specified.
When the NWA1000 Series uses the pre-defined list of NTP time servers, it randomly selects one server and
tries to synchronize with it. If the synchronization fails, then the NWA1000 Series goes through the rest of
the list in order from the first one tried until either it is successful or all the pre-defined NTP time servers
have been tried.
15.3.2 Time Server Synchronization
Click the Sync. Now button to get the time and date from the time server you specified in the Time
Server Address field.
When the Loading message appears, you may have to wait up to one minute.
Figure 85 Loading
The Current Time and Current Date fields will display the appropriate settings if the synchronization is
successful.
If the synchronization was not successful, a log displays in the View Log screen. Try re-configuring the
Date/Time screen.
To manually set the NWA1000 Series date and time:
1Click System > Date/Time.
2Select Manual under Time and Date Setup.
3Enter the NWA1000 Series’s time in the New Time field.
4Enter the NWA1000 Series’s date in the New Date field.
5Under Time Zone Setup, select your Time Zone from the list.
6As an option you can select the Enable Daylight Saving check box to adjust the NWA1000 Series clock
for daylight savings.
7Click Apply.
Table 64 Default Time Servers
0.pool.ntp.org
1.pool.ntp.org
2.pool.ntp.org
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
140
To get the NWA1000 Series date and time from a time server:
1Click System > Date/Time.
2Select Get from Time Server under Time and Date Setup.
3Under Time Zone Setup, select your Time Zone from the list.
4Under Time and Date Setup, enter a Time Server Address.
5Click Apply.
15.4 WWW Overview
The following figure shows secure and insecure management of the NWA1000 Series coming in from the
WAN. HTTPS and SSH access are secure. HTTP, Telnet, and FTP management access are not secure.
Figure 86 Secure and Insecure Service Access From the WAN
15.4.1 Service Access Limitations
A service cannot be used to access the NWA1000 Series when you have disabled that service in the
corresponding screen.
15.4.2 System Timeout
There is a lease timeout for administrators. The NWA1000 Series automatically logs you out if the
management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does
not time out when a statistics screen is polling.
Each user is also forced to log in the NWA1000 Series for authentication again when the
reauthentication time expires.
You can change the timeout settings in the User screens.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
141
15.4.3 HTTPS
You can set the NWA1000 Series to use HTTP or HTTPS (HTTPS adds security) for Web Configurator sessions.
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol that
encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that
enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot read the
transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data integrity (you know if
data has been changed).
It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys (see Chapter 14 on page 119 for more
information).
HTTPS on the NWA1000 Series is used so that you can securely access the NWA1000 Series using the Web
Configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the HTTPS server (the NWA1000 Series) must always
authenticate itself to the HTTPS client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the
NWA1000 Series), whereas the HTTPS client only should authenticate itself when the HTTPS server requires
it to do so (select Authenticate Client Certificat es in the WWW screen). Authenticate Client Certificates is
optional and if selected means the HTTPS client must send the NWA1000 Series a certificate. You must
apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the NWA1000 Series.
Please refer to the following figure.
1HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the NWA1000
Series’s web server.
2HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the NWA1000 Series’s web
server.
Figure 87 HTTP/HTTPS Implementation
Note: If you disable HTTP in the WWW screen, then the NWA1000 Series blocks all HTTP
connection attempts.
15.4.4 Configuring WWW Service Control
Click Configuration > System > WWW to open the WWW screen. Use this screen to specify HTTP or HTTPS
settings.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
142
Figure 88 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
15.4.5 HTTPS Example
If you haven’t changed the default HTTPS port on the NWA1000 Series, then in your browser enter
“https://NWA1000 Series IP Address/” as the web site address where “NWA1000 Series IP Address” is the
IP address or domain name of the NWA1000 Series you wish to access.
Table 65 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
HTTPS
Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches
the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the NWA1000 Series Web
Configurator using secure HTTPs connections.
Server Port The HTTPS server listens on port 443 by default. If you change the HTTPS server port to a
different number on the NWA1000 Series, for example 8443, then you must notify people
who need to access the NWA1000 Series Web Configurator to use “https://NWA1000
Series IP Address:8443” as the URL.
Authenticate Client
Certificates
Select Authenticate Client Certificates (optional) to require the SSL client to authenticate
itself to the NWA1000 Series by sending the NWA1000 Series a certificate. To do that the
SSL client must have a CA-signed certificate from a CA that has been imported as a
trusted CA on the NWA1000 Series.
Server Certificate Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the NWA1000 Series) uses to authenticate itself to the
HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen.
Redirect HTTP to HTTPS To allow only secure Web Configurator access, select this to redirect all HTTP connection
requests to the HTTPS server.
HTTP
Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches
the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the NWA1000 Series Web
Configurator using HTTP connections.
Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use
the same port number in order to use that service to access the NWA1000 Series.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
143
15.4.5.1 Google Chrome Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the NWA1000 Series HTTPS server, you will see the error message shown in
the following screen.
Figure 89 Security Alert Dialog Box (Google Chrome)
Select Advanced > Proceed to 192.168.1.2 (unsafe) to proceed to the Web Configurator login screen.
15.4.5.2 Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the NWA1000 Series HTTPS server, a Warning screen appears as shown in
the following screen. Click Learn More... if you want to verify more information about the certificate from
the NWA1000 Series.
Click Advanced > Accept the Risk and Continue.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
144
Figure 90 Security Certificate 1 (Firefox)
15.4.5.3 Avoiding Browser Warning Messages
Here are the main reasons your browser displays warnings about the NWA1000 Series’s HTTPS server
certificate and what you can do to avoid seeing the warnings:
• The issuing certificate authority of the NWA1000 Series’s HTTPS server certificate is not one of the
browser’s trusted certificate authorities. The issuing certificate authority of the NWA1000 Series's
factory default certificate is the NWA1000 Series itself since the certificate is a self-signed certificate.
• For the browser to trust a self-signed certificate, import the self-signed certificate into your operating
system as a trusted certificate.
• To have the browser trust the certificates issued by a certificate authority, import the certificate
authority’s certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate. Refer to Appendix A on
page 212 for details.
15.4.5.4 Enrolling and Importing SSL Client Certificates
The SSL client needs a certificate if Authenticate Client Certificates is selected on the NWA1000 Series.
You must have imported at least one trusted CA to the NWA1000 Series in order for the Authenticate
Client Certificates to be active (see the Certificates chapter for details).
Apply for a certificate from a Certification Authority (CA) that is trusted by the NWA1000 Series (see the
NWA1000 Series’s Trusted Certificates Web Configurator screen).
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
145
Figure 91 Trusted Certificates
The CA sends you a package containing the CA’s trusted certificate(s), your personal certificate(s) and
a password to install the personal certificate(s).
15.4.5.5 Installing a Personal Certificate
You need a password in advance. The CA may issue the password or you may have to specify it during
the enrollment. Double-click the personal certificate given to you by the CA to produce a screen similar
to the one shown next.
1Click Next to begin the wizard.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
146
2The file name and path of the certificate you double-clicked should automatically appear in the File
name text box. Click Browse if you wish to import a different certificate.
3Enter the password given to you by the CA.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
147
4Have the wizard determine where the certificate should be saved on your computer or select Place all
certificates in the following store and choose a different location.
5Click Finish to complete the wizard and begin the import process.
6You should see the following screen when the certificate is correctly installed on your computer.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
148
15.4.5.6 Using a Certificate When Accessing the NWA1000 Series
To access the NWA1000 Series via HTTPS:
1Enter ‘https://NWA1000 Series IP Address/’ in your browser’s web address field.
2When Authenticate Client Certificates is selected on the NWA1000 Series, the following screen asks you
to select a personal certificate to send to the NWA1000 Series. This screen displays even if you only have
a single certificate as in the example.
3You next see the Web Configurator login screen.
15.5 SSH
You can use SSH (Secure SHell) to securely access the NWA1000 Series’s command line interface.
SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide
secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network. In the following
figure, computer B on the Internet uses SSH to securely connect to the NWA1000 Series (A) for a
management session.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
149
Figure 92 SSH Communication Over the WAN Example
15.5.1 How SSH Works
The following figure is an example of how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts
using SSH v1.
Figure 93 How SSH v1 Works Example
1Host Identification
The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host key.
The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the
result back to the server.
The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server
public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
150
2Encryption Method
Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption
method to use.
3Authentication and Data Transmission
After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established
between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name
and password) to the server to log in to the server.
15.5.2 SSH Implementation on the NWA1000 Series
Your NWA1000 Series supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA authentication and four encryption
methods (AES, 3DES, Archfour, and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the NWA1000 Series for
management using port 22 (by default).
15.5.3 Requirements for Using SSH
You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system) that is
used to connect to the NWA1000 Series over SSH.
15.5.4 Configuring SSH
Click Configuration > System > SSH to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure your
NWA1000 Series’s Secure Shell settings.
Note: It is recommended that you disable Telnet and FTP when you configure SSH for secure
connections.
Figure 94 Configuration > System > SSH
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 66 Configuration > System > SSH
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP
address(es) in the Service Control table to access the NWA1000 Series CLI using this service.
Note: The NWA1000 Series uses only SSH version 2 protocol.
Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
151
15.5.5 Examples of Secure Telnet Using SSH
This section shows two examples using a command interface and a graphical interface SSH client
program to remotely access the NWA1000 Series. The configuration and connection steps are similar for
most SSH client programs. Refer to your SSH client program user’s guide.
15.5.5.1 Example 1: Microsoft Windows
This section describes how to access the NWA1000 Series using the Secure Shell Client program.
1Launch the SSH client and specify the connection information (IP address, port number) for the
NWA1000 Series.
2Configure the SSH client to accept connection using SSH version 2.
3A window displays prompting you to store the host key in you computer. Click Yes to continue.
Figure 95 SSH Example 1: Store Host Key
Enter the password to log in to the NWA1000 Series. The CLI screen displays next.
15.5.5.2 Example 2: Linux
This section describes how to access the NWA1000 Series using the OpenSSH client program that comes
with most Linux distributions.
Server Certificate Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the NWA1000
Series for SSH connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates
screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 66 Configuration > System > SSH (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
152
1Test whether the SSH service is available on the NWA1000 Series.
Enter “telnet 192.168.1.2 22” at a terminal prompt and press [ENTER]. The computer attempts to
connect to port 22 on the NWA1000 Series (using the default IP address of 192.168.1.2).
A message displays indicating the SSH protocol version supported by the NWA1000 Series.
Figure 96 SSH Example 2: Test
2Enter “ssh –2 192.168.1.2”. This command forces your computer to connect to the NWA1000 Series
using SSH version 1. If this is the first time you are connecting to the NWA1000 Series using SSH, a message
displays prompting you to save the host information of the NWA1000 Series. Type “yes” and press
[ENTER].
Then enter the password to log in to the NWA1000 Series.
Figure 97 SSH Example 2: Log in
3The CLI screen displays next.
15.6 Telnet
You can use Telnet to access the NWA1000 Series’s command line interface. Click Configuration >
System > TELNET to configure your NWA1000 Series for remote Telnet access. Use this screen to enable or
disable Telnet and set the server port number.
Figure 98 Configuration > System > TELNET
$ telnet 192.168.1.2 22
Trying 192.168.1.2...
Connected to 192.168.1.2.
Escape character is '^]'.
SSH-1.5-1.0.0
$ ssh –2 192.168.1.2
The authenticity of host '192.168.1.2 (192.168.1.2)' can't be established.
RSA1 key fingerprint is 21:6c:07:25:7e:f4:75:80:ec:af:bd:d4:3d:80:53:d1.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
Warning: Permanently added '192.168.1.2' (RSA1) to the list of known hosts.
Administrator@192.168.1.2's password:
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
153
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
15.7 FTP
You can upload and download the NWA1000 Series’s firmware and configuration files using FTP. To use
this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. See Chapter 17 on page 170 for more information
about firmware and configuration files.
To change your NWA1000 Series’s FTP settings, click Configuration > System > FTP tab. The screen
appears as shown. Use this screen to specify FTP settings.
Figure 99 Configuration > System > FTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 Configuration > System > TELNET
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP
address(es) in the Service Control table to access the NWA1000 Series CLI using this service.
Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 68 Configuration > System > FTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP
address(es) in the Service Control table to access the NWA1000 Series using this service.
TLS required Select the check box to use FTP over TLS (Transport Layer Security) to encrypt communication.
This implements TLS as a security mechanism to secure FTP clients and/or servers.
Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Certificate Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the NWA1000
Series for FTP connections. You must have certificates already configured in the M y Certificates
screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
154
15.8 SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information
between network devices. Your NWA1000 Series supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a
manager station to manage and monitor the NWA1000 Series through the network. The NWA1000 Series
supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1), version two (SNMPv2c), and version three (SNMPv3). The next
figure illustrates an SNMP management operation.
Figure 100 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the NWA1000 Series).
An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form
compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform
network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets
received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed
objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these
objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager
issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
• Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
• GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent.
In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get
operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
• Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
155
• Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
15.8.1 Supported MIBs
The NWA1000 Series supports MIB II that is defined in RFC-1213 and RFC-1215. The NWA1000 Series also
supports private MIBs (ZYXEL-ES-CAPWAP.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-COMMON.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-ZyXELAPMgmt.MIB,
ZYXEL-ES-PROWLAN.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-RFMGMT.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-SMI.MIB, and ZYXEL-ES-WIRELESS.MIB) to collect
information about CPU and memory usage and VPN total throughput. The focus of the MIBs is to let
administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance. You can download the
NWA1000 Series’s MIBs from www.zyxel.com.
15.8.2 SNMP Traps
The NWA1000 Series will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs.
15.8.3 Configuring SNMP
To change your NWA1000 Series’s SNMP settings, click Configuration > System > SNMP tab. The screen
appears as shown. Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings. You can also configure user profiles
that define allowed SNMPv3 access.
Figure 101 Configuration > System > SNMP
Table 69 SNMP Traps
OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
linkDown 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down.
linkUp 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up.
authenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from non-
authenticated hosts.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
156
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
15.8.4 Adding or Editing an SNMPv3 User Profile
This screen allows you to add or edit an SNMPv3 user profile. To access this screen, click the
Configuration > System > SNMP screen’s Add button or select a SNMPv3 user profile from the list and
click the Edit button.
Table 70 Configuration > System > SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow users to access the NWA1000 Series using SNMP.
Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Trap
Community Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager.
The default is public and allows all requests.
Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to.
Trap Wireless
Event
Select this to have the NWA1000 Series send a trap to the SNMP manager when a wireless
client is connected to or disconnected from the NWA1000 Series.
SNMPv2c Select this to allow SNMP managers using SNMPv2c to access the NWA1000 Series.
Get Community Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests
from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests.
Set Community Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the
management station. The default is private and allows all requests.
SNMPv3 Select this to allow SNMP managers using SNMPv3 to access the NWA1000 Series.
Add Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the
selected entry.
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry’s settings.
Remove To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The NWA1000 Series confirms you want to
remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this
action.
#This the index number of an SNMPv3 user profile.
User Name This is the name of the user for which this SNMPv3 user profile is configured.
Authentication This field displays the type of authentication the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the
NWA1000 Series using this SNMPv3 user profile.
Privacy This field displays the type of encryption the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the NWA1000
Series using this SNMPv3 user profile.
Privilege This field displays whether the SNMPv3 user can have read-only or read and write access to
the NWA1000 Series using this SNMPv3 user profile.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Chapter 15 System
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
157
Figure 102 Configuration > System > SNMP > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 Configuration > System > SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Name Select the user name of the user account for which this SNMPv3 user profile is configured.
Authentication Select the type of authentication the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the NWA1000 Series
using this SNMPv3 user profile.
Select MD5 to require the SNMPv3 user’s password be encrypted by MD5 for authentication.
Select SHA to require the SNMPv3 user’s password be encrypted by SHA for authentication.
Privacy Select the type of encryption the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the NWA1000 Series
using this SNMPv3 user profile.
Select NONE to not encrypt the SNMPv3 communications.
Select DES to use DES to encrypt the SNMPv3 communications.
Select AES to use AES to encrypt the SNMPv3 communications.
Privilege Select whether the SNMPv3 user can have read-only or read and write access to the NWA1000
Series using this SNMPv3 user profile.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
158
CHAPTER 16
Log and Report
16.1 Overview
Use the system screens to configure daily reporting and log settings.
16.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter
• The Email Daily Report screen (Section 16.2 on page 158) configures how and where to send daily
reports and what reports to send.
• The Log Setting screens (Section 16.3 on page 160) specify which logs are e-mailed, where they are e-
mailed, and how often they are e-mailed.
16.2 Email Daily Report
Use this screen to start or stop data collection and view various statistics about traffic passing through
your NWA1000 Series.
Note: Data collection may decrease the NWA1000 Series’s traffic throughput rate.
Click Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report to display the following screen. Configure this
screen to have the NWA1000 Series e-mail you system statistics every day.
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
159
Figure 103 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Email
Daily Report
Select this to send reports by e-mail every day.
Mail Server Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server.
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
160
16.3 Log Setting
These screens control log messages and alerts. A log message stores the information for viewing (for
example, in the Monitor > View Log screen) or regular e-mailing later, and an alert is e-mailed
immediately. Usually, alerts are used for events that require more serious attention, such as system errors
and attacks.
The NWA1000 Series provides a system log and supports e-mail profiles and remote syslog servers. The
system log is available on the View Log screen, the e-mail profiles are used to mail log messages to the
specified destinations, and the other four logs are stored on specified syslog servers.
The Log Setting tab also controls what information is saved in each log. For the system log, you can also
specify which log messages are e-mailed, where they are e-mailed, and how often they are e-mailed.
For alerts, the Log Setting screen controls which events generate alerts and where alerts are e-mailed.
The Log Setting screen provides a summary of all the settings. You can use the Edit Log Setting screen to
maintain the detailed settings (such as log categories, e-mail addresses, server names, etc.) for any log.
SSL/TLS
Encryption
Select SSL/TLS to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) if you want
encrypted communications between the mail server and the NWA1000 Series.
Select STARTTLS to upgrade a plain text connection to a secure connection using SSL/TLS.
Select No to not encrypt the communications.
Mail Server Port Enter the same port number here as is on the mail server for mail traffic.
Mail Subject Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail. Select Append system name to add the NWA1000
Series’s system name to the subject. Select Append date time to add the NWA1000 Series’s
system date and time to the subject.
Mail From Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used in
replies.
Mail To Type the e-mail address (or addresses) to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered.
SMTP
Authentication
Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP server.
User Name This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the user name to
provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Password This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the password to
provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Send Report
Now
Click this button to have the NWA1000 Series send the daily e-mail report immediately.
Time for sending
report
Select the time of day (hours and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation.
Report Items Select the information to include in the report. Select Reset counters after sending report
successfully if you only want to see statistics for a 24 hour period.
Reset All
Counters
Click this to discard all report data and start all of the counters over at zero.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 72 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
161
Alternatively, if you want to edit what events is included in each log, you can also use the Active Log
Summary screen to edit this information for all logs at the same time.
16.3.1 Log Setting Screen
To access this screen, click Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting.
Figure 104 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 73 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the
entry’s settings.
Activate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate.
Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log.
Status This field shows whether the log is active or not.
Name This field displays the name of the log (system log or one of the remote servers).
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
162
16.3.2 Edit System Log Settings
This screen controls the detailed settings for each log in the system log (which includes the e-mail
profiles). Select a system log entry in the Log Setting screen and click the Edit icon.
Log Format This field displays the format of the log.
Internal - system log; you can view the log on the View Log tab.
VRPT/Syslog - Zyxel’s Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format.
CEF/Syslog - Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format.
Summary This field is a summary of the settings for each log.
Active Log
Summary
Click this button to open the Active Log Summary screen.
Apply Click this button to save your changes (activate and deactivate logs) and make them take
effect.
Table 73 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
163
Figure 105 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
164
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 74 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
E-Mail Server 1/2
Active Select this to send log messages and alerts according to the information in this section.
You specify what kinds of log messages are included in log information and what kinds of
log messages are included in alerts in the Active Log and Alert section.
Mail Server Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server.
SSL/TLS Encryption Select SSL/TLS to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) if you
want encrypted communications between the mail server and the NWA1000 Series.
Select STARTTLS to upgrade a plain text connection to a secure connection using SSL/TLS.
Select No to not encrypt the communications.
Mail Server Port Enter the same port number here as is on the mail server for mail traffic.
Mail Subject Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail. Select Append system name to add the
NWA1000 Series’s system name to the subject. Select Append date time to add the
NWA1000 Series’s system date and time to the subject.
Send From Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used
in replies.
Send Log To Type the e-mail address to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered.
Send Alerts To Type the e-mail address to which alerts are delivered.
Sending Log Select how often log information is e-mailed. Choices are: When Full, Hourly and When
Full, Daily and When Full, and Weekly and When Full.
Day for Sending Log This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly. Select the day of the week the log is e-
mailed.
Time for Sending
Log This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly or daily. Select the time of day (hours
and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation.
SMTP
Authentication Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP
server.
User Name This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the user
name to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Password This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the
password to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Active Log and Alert
System log Use the System Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories.
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category for the system log or
e-mail any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2.
enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all
categories for the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the
NWA1000 Series will e-mail logs to them.
enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts,
and debugging information for all categories. The NWA1000 Series does not e-mail
debugging information, even if this setting is selected.
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
165
E-mail Server 1 Use the E-Mail Server 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail
server 1 for all log categories.
Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1
settings.
enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail
server 1.
enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server
1.
E-mail Server 2 Use the E-Mail Server 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail
server 2 for all log categories.
Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2
settings.
enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail
server 2.
enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server
2.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.
Log Category This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display
and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging
messages generated by open source software.
System log Select which events you want to log by Log Category. There are three choices:
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category
enable normal logs (green checkmark) - create log messages and alerts from this
category
enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts,
and debugging information from this category; the NWA1000 Series does not e-mail
debugging information, however, even if this setting is selected.
E-mail Server 1 Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it
is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail
settings specified in E-Mail Server 1. The NWA1000 Series does not e-mail debugging
information, even if it is recorded in the System log.
E-mail Server 2 Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is e-
mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail
settings specified in E-Mail Server 2. The NWA1000 Series does not e-mail debugging
information, even if it is recorded in the System log.
Log Consolidation
Active Select this to activate log consolidation. Log consolidation aggregates multiple log
messages that arrive within the specified Log Consolidation Interval. In the View Log tab,
the text “[count=x]”, where x is the number of original log messages, is appended at the
end of the Message field, when multiple log messages were aggregated.
Log Consolidation
Interval Type how often, in seconds, to consolidate log information. If the same log message
appears multiple times, it is aggregated into one log message with the text “[count=x]”,
where x is the number of original log messages, appended at the end of the Message
field.
OK Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.
Table 74 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
166
16.3.3 Edit Remote Server
This screen controls the settings for each log in the remote server (syslog). Select a remote server entry in
the Log Setting screen and click the Edit icon.
Figure 106 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit Remote Server
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
167
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
16.3.4 Active Log Summary
This screen allows you to view and to edit what information is included in the system log, e-mail profiles,
and remote servers at the same time. It does not let you change other log settings (for example, where
and how often log information is e-mailed or remote server names). To access this screen, go to the Log
Setting screen, and click the Active Log Summary button.
Table 75 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit Remote Server
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Log Settings for
Remote Server
Active Select this check box to send log information according to the information in this section. You
specify what kinds of messages are included in log information in the Active Log section.
Log Format This field displays the format of the log information. It is read-only.
VRPT/Syslog - Zyxel’s Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format.
CEF/Syslog - Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format.
Server
Address Type the server name or the IP address of the syslog server to which to send log information.
Log Facility Select a log facility. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog
server. Please see the documentation for your syslog program for more information.
Active Log
Selection Use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories.
disable all logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category.
enable normal logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and alerts for all
log categories.
enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log
messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.
Log Category This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and
Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages
generated by open source software.
Selection Select what information you want to log from each Log Category (except All Logs; see below).
Choices are:
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category
enable normal logs (green checkmark) - log regular information and alerts from this category
enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information, alerts, and
debugging information from this category
OK Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
168
Figure 107 Active Log Summary
This screen provides a different view and a different way of indicating which messages are included in
each log and each alert. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open
source software.
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 76 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Active Log Summary
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Log
Summary
System log Use the System Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories.
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category for the system log or e-mail
any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2.
enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all categories for
the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the NWA1000 Series will e-
mail logs to them.
enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and
debugging information for all categories. The NWA1000 Series does not e-mail debugging
information, even if this setting is selected.
Chapter 16 Log and Report
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
169
E-mail Server 1 Use the E-Mail Server 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server
1 for all log categories.
Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1 settings.
enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server
1.
enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 1.
E-mail Server 2 Use the E-Mail Server 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server
2 for all log categories.
Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2 settings.
enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server
2.
enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 2.
Remote Server
1~4
For each remote server, use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the
log categories.
disable all logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category.
enable normal logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and alerts for all
log categories.
enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log
messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.
# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.
Log Category This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and
Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages
generated by open source software.
System log Select which events you want to log by Log Category. There are three choices:
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category
enable normal logs (green checkmark) - create log messages and alerts from this category
enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and
debugging information from this category; the NWA1000 Series does not e-mail debugging
information, however, even if this setting is selected.
E-mail Server 1 E-
mail
Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it is e-
mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings
specified in E-Mail Server 1. The NWA1000 Series does not e-mail debugging information, even
if it is recorded in the System log.
E-mail Server 2 E-
mail
Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is e-
mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings
specified in E-Mail Server 2. The NWA1000 Series does not e-mail debugging information, even
if it is recorded in the System log.
Remote Server
1~4 Syslog
For each remote server, select what information you want to log from each Log Category
(except All Logs; see below). Choices are:
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category
enable normal logs (green checkmark) - log regular information and alerts from this category
enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information, alerts, and
debugging information from this category
OK Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.
Table 76 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Active Log Summary (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
170
CHAPTER 17
File Manager
17.1 Overview
Configuration files define the NWA1000 Series’s settings. Shell scripts are files of commands that you can
store on the NWA1000 Series and run when you need them. You can apply a configuration file or run a
shell script without the NWA1000 Series restarting. You can store multiple configuration files and shell
script files on the NWA1000 Series. You can edit configuration files or shell scripts in a text editor and
upload them to the NWA1000 Series. Configuration files use a .conf extension and shell scripts use a .zysh
extension.
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Configuration File screen (Section 17.2 on page 171) stores and names configuration files. You
can also download and upload configuration files.
• The Firmware Package screen (Section 17.3 on page 176) checks your current firmware version and
uploads firmware to the NWA1000 Series.
• The Shell Script screen (Section 17.4 on page 178) stores, names, downloads, uploads and runs shell
script files.
17.1.2 What you Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Configuration Files and Shell Scripts
When you apply a configuration file, the NWA1000 Series uses the factory default settings for any
features that the configuration file does not include. When you run a shell script, the NWA1000 Series
only applies the commands that it contains. Other settings do not change.
These files have the same syntax, which is also identical to the way you run CLI commands manually. An
example is shown below.
Figure 108 Configuration File / Shell Script: Example
# enter configuration mode
configure terminal
# change administrator password
username admin password 4321 user-type admin
#configure default radio profile, change 2GHz channel to 11 & Tx output
power # to 50%
wlan-radio-profile default
2g-channel 11
output-power 50%
exit
write
Chapter 17 File Manager
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
171
While configuration files and shell scripts have the same syntax, the NWA1000 Series applies
configuration files differently than it runs shell scripts. This is explained below.
You have to run the aforementioned example as a shell script because the first command is run in
Privilege mode. If you remove the first command, you have to run the example as a configuration file
because the rest of the commands are executed in Configuration mode.
Comments in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts
In a configuration file or shell script, use “#” or “!” as the first character of a command line to have the
NWA1000 Series treat the line as a comment.
Your configuration files or shell scripts can use “exit” or a command line consisting of a single “!” to have
the NWA1000 Series exit sub command mode.
Note: “exit” or “!'” must follow sub commands if it is to make the NWA1000 Series exit sub
command mode.
In the following example lines 1 and 2 are comments. Line 7 exits sub command mode.
Errors in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts
When you apply a configuration file or run a shell script, the NWA1000 Series processes the file line-by-
line. The NWA1000 Series checks the first line and applies the line if no errors are detected. Then it
continues with the next line. If the NWA1000 Series finds an error, it stops applying the configuration file or
shell script and generates a log.
You can change the way a configuration file or shell script is applied. Include setenv stop-on-error
off in the configuration file or shell script. The NWA1000 Series ignores any errors in the configuration file
or shell script and applies all of the valid commands. The NWA1000 Series still generates a log for any
errors.
17.2 Configuration File
Click Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File to open this screen. Use the Configuration File
screen to store, run, and name configuration files. You can also download configuration files from the
Table 77 Configuration Files and Shell Scripts in the NWA1000 Series
Configuration Files (.conf) Shell Scripts (.zysh)
• Resets to default configuration.
•Goes into CLI Configuration mode.
• Runs the commands in the configuration file.
•Goes into CLI Privilege mode.
• Runs the commands in the shell script.
! this is from Joe
# on 2010/12/05
wlan-ssid-profile default
ssid Joe-AP
qos wmm
security default
!
Chapter 17 File Manager
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
172
NWA1000 Series to your computer and upload configuration files from your computer to the NWA1000
Series.
Once your NWA1000 Series is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you
back up your configuration file before making further configuration changes. The backup configuration
file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Configuration File Flow at Restart
• If there is not a startup-config.conf when you restart the NWA1000 Series (whether through a
management interface or by physically turning the power off and back on), the NWA1000 Series uses
the system-default.conf configuration file with the NWA1000 Series’s default settings.
•If there is a startup-config.conf, the NWA1000 Series checks it for errors and applies it. If there are no
errors, the NWA1000 Series uses it and copies it to the lastgood.conf configuration file as a back up
file. If there is an error, the NWA1000 Series generates a log and copies the startup-config.conf
configuration file to the startup-config-bad.conf configuration file and tries the existing lastgood.conf
configuration file. If there isn’t a lastgood.conf configuration file or it also has an error, the NWA1000
Series applies the system-default.conf configuration file.
• You can change the way the startup-config.conf file is applied. Include the setenv-startup stop-
on-error off command. The NWA1000 Series ignores any errors in the startup-config.conf file and
applies all of the valid commands. The NWA1000 Series still generates a log for any errors.
Figure 109 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File
Do not turn off the NWA1000 Series while configuration file upload is in
progress.
Chapter 17 File Manager
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
173
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 78 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Rename Use this button to change the label of a configuration file on the NWA1000 Series. You can only
rename manually saved configuration files. You cannot rename the lastgood.conf, system-
default.conf and startup-config.conf files.
You cannot rename a configuration file to the name of another configuration file in the
NWA1000 Series.
Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen.
Specify the new name for the configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-
9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).
Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of
the configuration file.
Remove Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Remove to delete it from the NWA1000
Series. You can only delete manually saved configuration files. You cannot delete the system-
default.conf, startup-config.conf and lastgood.conf files.
A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the configuration file. Click OK
to delete the configuration file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the
configuration file.
Download Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your
computer.
Copy Use this button to save a duplicate of a configuration file on the NWA1000 Series.
Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen.
Specify a name for the duplicate configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-
9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).
Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of
the configuration file.
Chapter 17 File Manager
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
174
Apply Use this button to have the NWA1000 Series use a specific configuration file.
Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Apply to have the NWA1000 Series use that
configuration file. The NWA1000 Series does not have to restart in order to use a different
configuration file, although you will need to wait for a few minutes while the system
reconfigures.
The following screen gives you options for what the NWA1000 Series is to do if it encounters an
error in the configuration file.
Immediately stop applying the configuration file - this is not recommended because it would
leave the rest of the configuration blank. If the interfaces were not configured before the first
error, the console port may be the only way to access the device.
Immediately stop applying the configuration file and roll back to the previous configuration -
this gets the NWA1000 Series started with a fully valid configuration file as quickly as possible.
Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file - this applies the valid parts of the
configuration file and generates error logs for all of the configuration file’s errors. This lets the
NWA1000 Series apply most of your configuration and you can refer to the logs for what to fix.
Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file and then roll back to the previous
configuration - this applies the valid parts of the configuration file, generates error logs for all of
the configuration file’s errors, and starts the NWA1000 Series with a fully valid configuration file.
Click OK to have the NWA1000 Series start applying the configuration file or click Cancel to
close the screen
#This column displays the number for each configuration file entry. This field is a sequential value,
and it is not associated with a specific address. The total number of configuration files that you
can save depends on the sizes of the configuration files and the available flash storage space.
File Name This column displays the label that identifies a configuration file.
You cannot delete the following configuration files or change their file names.
The system-default.conf file contains the NWA1000 Series’s default settings. Select this file and
click Apply to reset all of the NWA1000 Series settings to the factory defaults. This configuration
file is included when you upload a firmware package.
The startup-config.conf file is the configuration file that the NWA1000 Series is currently using. If
you make and save changes during your management session, the changes are applied to
this configuration file. The NWA1000 Series applies configuration changes made in the Web
Configurator to the configuration file when you click Apply or OK. It applies configuration
changes made via commands when you use the write command.
The lastgood.conf is the most recently used (valid) configuration file that was saved when the
device last restarted. If you upload and apply a configuration file with an error, you can apply
lastgood.conf to return to a valid configuration.
Size This column displays the size (in KB) of a configuration file.
Table 78 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 File Manager
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
175
17.2.1 Example of Configuration File Download Using FTP
The following example gets a configuration file named startup-config.conf from the NWA1000 Series
and saves it on the computer.
1Connect your computer to the NWA1000 Series.
2The FTP server IP address of the NWA1000 Series in standalone mode is 192.168.1.2, so set your computer
to use a static IP address from 192.168.1.3 ~192.168.1.254.
3Use an FTP client on your computer to connect to the NWA1000 Series. For example, in the Windows
command prompt, type ftp 192.168.1.2. Keep the console session connected in order to see when
the firmware recovery finishes.
4Enter your user name when prompted.
5Enter your password as requested.
6Use “cd” to change to the directory that contains the files you want to download.
7Use “dir” or “ls” if you need to display a list of the files in the directory.
8Use "get” to download files. Transfer the configuration file on the NWA1000 Series to your computer. Type
get followed by the name of the configuration file. This examples uses get startup-config.conf.
Last Modified This column displays the date and time that the individual configuration files were last changed
or saved.
Upload
Configuration File
The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file
from your computer to your NWA1000 Series
You cannot upload a configuration file named system-default.conf or lastgood.conf.
If you upload startup-config.conf, it will replace the current configuration and immediately
apply the new settings.
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it.
Browse... Click Browse... to find the .conf file you want to upload. The configuration file must use a
“.conf” filename extension. You will receive an error message if you try to upload a fie of a
different format. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can
upload them.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
Table 78 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 File Manager
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
176
9Wait for the file transfer to complete.
10 Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.
17.3 Firmware Package
Click Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package to open this screen. Use the Firmware Package
screen to check your current firmware version and upload firmware to the NWA1000 Series.
Note: The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware. You only
need to use the command line interface if you need to recover the firmware. See the
CLI Reference Guide for how to determine if you need to recover the firmware and
how to recover it.
Find the firmware package at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses a .bin extension.
The firmware update can take up to five minutes. Do not turn off or reset
the NWA1000 Series while the firmware update is in progress!
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.2
Connected to 192.168.1.2.
220---------- Welcome to Pure-FTPd [privsep] [TLS] ----------
220-You are user number 1 of 5 allowed.
220-Local time is now 21:28. Server port: 21.
220-This is a private system - No anonymous login
220 You will be disconnected after 600 minutes of inactivity.
User (192.168.1.2:(none)): admin
331 User admin OK. Password required
Password:
230 OK. Current restricted directory is /
ftp> cd conf
250 OK. Current directory is /conf
ftp> ls
200 PORT command successful
150 Connecting to port 5001
lastgood.conf
startup-config.conf
system-default.conf
226 3 matches total
ftp: 57 bytes received in 0.33Seconds 0.17Kbytes/sec.
ftp> get startup-config.conf
200 PORT command successful
150 Connecting to port 5002
226-File successfully transferred
226 0.002 seconds (measured here), 1.66 Mbytes per second
ftp: 2928 bytes received in 0.02Seconds 183.00Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
Chapter 17 File Manager
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
177
Figure 110 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
After you see the Firmware Upload in Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the NWA1000
Series again.
Note: The NWA1000 Series automatically reboots after a successful upload.
The NWA1000 Series automatically restarts causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating
systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 111 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After five minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Dashboard screen.
17.3.1 Example of Firmware Upload Using FTP
This procedure requires the NWA1000 Series’s firmware. Download the firmware package from
www.zyxel.com and unzip it. The firmware file uses a .bin extension, for example, "525ABEL0C0.bin". Do
the following after you have obtained the firmware file.
1Connect your computer to the NWA1000 Series.
Table 79 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Boot
Module
This is the version of the boot module that is currently on the NWA1000 Series.
Current
Version
This is the firmware version and the date created.
Released
Date
This is the date that the version of the firmware was created.
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it.
Browse... Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
Chapter 17 File Manager
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
178
2The FTP server IP address of the NWA1000 Series in standalone mode is 192.168.1.2, so set your computer
to use a static IP address from 192.168.1.3 ~192.168.1.254.
3Use an FTP client on your computer to connect to the NWA1000 Series. For example, in the Windows
command prompt, type ftp 192.168.1.2. Keep the console session connected in order to see when
the firmware recovery finishes.
4Enter your user name when prompted.
5Enter your password as requested.
6Enter “hash” for FTP to print a `#' character for every 1024 bytes of data you upload so that you can
watch the file transfer progress.
7Enter “bin” to set the transfer mode to binary.
8Transfer the firmware file from your computer to the NWA1000 Series. Type put followed by the path
and name of the firmware file. This examples uses put C:\ftproot\NWA1000
Series_FW\525ABEL0C0.bin.
9Wait for the file transfer to complete.
10 Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.
17.4 Shell Script
Use shell script files to have the NWA1000 Series use commands that you specify. Use a text editor to
create the shell script files. They must use a “.zysh” filename extension.
Click Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script to open this screen. Use the Shell Script screen to store,
name, download, upload and run shell script files. You can store multiple shell script files on the
NWA1000 Series at the same time.
Note: You should include write commands in your scripts. If you do not use the write
command, the changes will be lost when the NWA1000 Series restarts. You could use
multiple write commands in a long script.
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.2
Connected to 192.168.1.2.
220---------- Welcome to Pure-FTPd [privsep] [TLS] ----------
220-You are user number 1 of 5 allowed.
220-Local time is now 21:28. Server port: 21.
220-This is a private system - No anonymous login
220 You will be disconnected after 600 minutes of inactivity.
User (192.168.1.2:(none)): admin
331 User admin OK. Password required
Password:
230 OK. Current restricted directory is /
ftp> hash
Hash mark printing On ftp: (2048 bytes/hash mark) .
ftp> bin
200 TYPE is now 8-bit binary
ftp> put C:\ftproot\NWA1000 Series_FW\525ABEL0C0.bin
Chapter 17 File Manager
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
179
Figure 112 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 80 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Rename Use this button to change the label of a shell script file on the NWA1000 Series.
You cannot rename a shell script to the name of another shell script in the NWA1000 Series.
Click a shell script’s row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen.
Specify the new name for the shell script file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-
9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).
Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the
configuration file.
Remove Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Delete to delete the shell script file from the
NWA1000 Series.
A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the shell script file. Click OK to delete
the shell script file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the shell script file.
Download Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your
computer.
Copy Use this button to save a duplicate of a shell script file on the NWA1000 Series.
Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen.
Specify a name for the duplicate file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-
9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).
Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the
configuration file.
Apply Use this button to have the NWA1000 Series use a specific shell script file.
Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Apply to have the NWA1000 Series use that shell
script file. You may need to wait awhile for the NWA1000 Series to finish applying the commands.
#This column displays the number for each shell script file entry.
File Name This column displays the label that identifies a shell script file.
Size This column displays the size (in KB) of a shell script file.
Last
Modified
This column displays the date and time that the individual shell script files were last changed or
saved.
Upload Shell
Script
The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved shell script file from
your computer to your NWA1000 Series.
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it.
Chapter 17 File Manager
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
180
Browse... Click Browse... to find the .zysh file you want to upload.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to several minutes.
Table 80 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
181
CHAPTER 18
Diagnostics
18.1 Overview
Use the diagnostics screen for troubleshooting.
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Diagnostics screen (Section 18.2 on page 181) generates a file containing the NWA1000 Series’s
configuration and diagnostic information if you need to provide it to customer support during
troubleshooting.
18.2 Diagnostics
This screen provides an easy way for you to generate a file containing the NWA1000 Series’s
configuration and diagnostic information. You may need to generate this file and send it to customer
support during troubleshooting.
Click Maintenance > Diagnostics to open the Diagnostic screen.
Figure 113 Maintenance > Diagnostics
Chapter 18 Diagnostics
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
182
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 81 Maintenance > Diagnostics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Filename This is the name of the most recently created diagnostic file.
Last modified This is the date and time that the last diagnostic file was created. The format is yyyy-mm-dd
hh:mm:ss.
Size This is the size of the most recently created diagnostic file.
Diagnostic Collect
Category
This field displays each category of settings. Select which categories you want the
NWA1000 Series to include in the diagnostic file.
Customized Select this option to obtain the diagnostic information for configuration which is not
included in a pre-defined category.
Script If you select the Customized option, select a shell script file from the drop-down list. You can
upload a new shell script file using the Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script screen.
Collect Now Click this to have the NWA1000 Series create a new diagnostic file.
Download Click this to save the most recent diagnostic file to a computer.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
183
CHAPTER 19
LEDs
19.1 Overview
The LEDs of your NWA1000 Series can be controlled such that they stay lit (ON) or OFF after the NWA1000
Series is ready. There are two features that control the LEDs of your NWA1000 Series - Locator and
Suppression.
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Suppression screen (Section 19.2 on page 183)) allows you to set how you want the LEDs to
behave after the device is ready.
• The Locator screen (Section 19.3 on page 184) allows users to see the actual location of the NWA1000
Series between several devices in the network.
19.2 Suppression Screen
The LED Suppression feature allows you to control how the LEDs of your NWA1000 Series behave after it’s
ready. The default LED suppression setting of your AP is different depending on your NWA1000 Series
model.
You can go to the Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression screen to see the default LED behavior and
change the LED suppression setting. After you make changes in the suppression screen, it will be stored
as the default when the NWA1000 Series is restarted. See (Section 3.1 on page 19) for information on
default values for different models.
Note: When the NWA1000 Series is booting or performing firmware upgrade, the LEDs will lit
regardless of the setting in LED suppression.
To access this screen, click Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression.
Chapter 19 LEDs
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
184
Figure 114 Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression
The following table describes fields in the above screen.
19.3 Locator Screen
The Locator feature identifies the location of your NWA1000 Series among several devices in the
network. You can run this feature and set a timer in this screen.
To run the locator feature, enter a number of minutes and click Turn On button to have the NWA1000
Series find its location. The Locator LED will start to blink for the number of minutes set in the Locator
screen. The default setting is 10 minutes. While the locator is running, the Turn On button will gray out
and return after it’s finished. If you make changes to the time default setting, it will be stored as the
default when the NWA1000 Series restarts.
Note: The Locator feature is not affected by the Suppression setting.
To access this screen, click Maintenance > LEDs > Locator.
Figure 115 Maintenance > LEDs > Locator
Table 82 Maintenance > LED > Suppression
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Suppression On If the Suppression On check box is checked, the LEDs of your NWA1000 Series will turn off
after it’s ready.
If the check box is unchecked, the LEDs will stay lit after the NWA1000 Series is ready.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Chapter 19 LEDs
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
185
The following table describes fields in the above screen.
Table 83 Maintenance > LED > Locator
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Turn On
Turn Off
Click Turn On button to activate the locator. The Locator function will show the actual
location of the NWA1000 Series between several devices in the network.
Otherwise, click Turn Off to disable the locator feature.
Automatically Extinguish
After
Enter a time interval between 1 and 60 minutes to stop the locator LED from blinking.
Default is 10 minutes.
Apply Click Apply to save changes in this screen.
Refresh Click Refresh to update the information in this screen.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
186
CHAPTER 20
Antenna Switch
20.1 Overview
Use this screen to adjust coverage depending on the orientation of the antenna.
20.1.1 What You Need To Know
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.
On the NWA1000 Series that comes with internal antennas and also has an antenna switch, you can
adjust coverage depending on the orientation of the antenna for the NWA1000 Series radios using the
web configurator, the command line interface (CLI) or a physical switch. Check Table 1 on page 12 to
see if your NWA1000 Series has an antenna switch.
Figure 116 NWA1000 Series Physical Antenna Switch
Note: With the physical antenna switch, you apply the same antenna orientation settings to
both radios. You can set the radios to have different settings while using the web
configurator or the command line interface.
Note: The antenna switch in the web configurator has priority over the physical antenna
switch after you Enable Software Control in the Maintenance > Antenna screen. By
default, software control is disabled.
20.2 Antenna Switch Screen
To access this screen, click Maintenance > Antenna.
Chapter 20 Antenna Switch
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
187
Figure 117 Maintenance > Antenna > Antenna Switch
Select the Enable Software Control option to use the Web configurator to adjust coverage depending
on each radio’s antenna orientation for better coverage. Select Wall if you mount the NWA1000 Series
to a wall. Select Ceiling if the NWA1000 Series is mounted on a ceiling. You can switch from Wall to
Ceiling if there are still wireless dead zones, and vice versa.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
188
CHAPTER 21
Reboot
21.1 Overview
Use this screen to restart the device.
21.1.1 What You Need To Know
If you applied changes in the Web configurator, these were saved automatically and do not change
when you reboot. If you made changes in the CLI, however, you have to use the write command to
save the configuration before you reboot. Otherwise, the changes are lost when you reboot.
Reboot is different to reset; reset returns the device to its default configuration.
21.2 Reboot
This screen allows remote users can restart the device. To access this screen, click Maintenance >
Reboot.
Figure 118 Maintenance > Reboot
Click the Reboot button to restart the NWA1000 Series. Wait a few minutes until the login screen appears.
If the login screen does not appear, type the IP address of the device in your Web browser.
You can also use the CLI command reboot to restart the NWA1000 Series.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
189
CHAPTER 22
Shutdown
22.1 Overview
Use this screen to shut down the device.
Always use Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown or the shutdown
command before you turn off the NWA1000 Series or remove the power.
Not doing so can cause the firmware to become corrupt.
22.1.1 What You Need To Know
Shutdown writes all cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes. Shutdown is
different to reset; reset returns the device to its default configuration.
22.2 Shutdown
To access this screen, click Maintenance > Shutdown.
Figure 119 Maintenance > Shutdown
Click the Shutdown button to shut down the NWA1000 Series. Wait for the device to shut down before
you manually turn off or remove the power. It does not turn off the power.
You can also use the CLI command shutdown to shut down the NWA1000 Series.
190
PART II
Local Management
in Cloud Mode
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
191
CHAPTER 23
Cloud Mode
23.1 Overview
The NWA1000 Series is managed and provisioned automatically by the NCC (Nebula Control Center)
when it is connected to the Internet and has been registered in the NCC. If you need to change the
NWA1000 Series’s VLAN setting or manually set its IP address, access its simplified web configurator. You
can check the NCC's AP > Monitor > Access Point screen or the connected gateway for the NWA1000
Series's current LAN IP address. Alternatively, disconnect the gateway or disable its DHCP server function
and use the NWA1000 Series's default static LAN IP address (192.168.1.2).
23.2 Ways to Manage the NWA1000 Series
You can use the following ways to manage the NWA1000 Series. If you need to change the NWA1000
Series’s VLAN setting or manually set its IP address before connecting it to the Internet, use its built-in
Web Configurator.
http://192.168.1.2
http://nebula.zyxel.com http://(DHCP-assigned IP)
Chapter 23 Cloud Mode
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
192
Web Configurator
The Web Configurator allows basic NWA1000 Series setup and monitoring using an Internet browser. Use
this for troubleshooting if you cannot connect to the Internet. This User’s Guide provides information
about the Web Configurator.
NCC
With the NCC, you can remotely manage and monitor the NWA1000 Series through a cloud-based
network management system. See the NCC User’s Guide for more information.
23.3 Good Habits for Managing the NWA1000 Series
Do the following things regularly to make the NWA1000 Series more secure and to manage it more
effectively.
• Change the system password through the NCC often. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and
that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
193
CHAPTER 24
The Web Configurator
24.1 Overview
The NWA1000 Series Web Configurator allows easy management using an Internet browser.
See Section 5.1 on page 34 for requirements in using the Web Configurator
24.2 Access
1Make sure your NWA1000 Series hardware is properly connected. See the Quick Start Guide.
2Make sure your computer’s IP address is in the same subnet as the NWA1000 Series’s IP address.
3Browse to http://(NWA1000 Series’s IP address). See Section 23.1 on page 191 for more information.
4The Login screen appears.
5Enter the user name (default: “admin”) and password (default: “1234”). If the NWA1000 Series is being
managed or has been managed by the NCC, check the NCC's Site-Wide > Configure > General setting
screen for the NWA1000 Series's current password.
Click the Visit button when you want to open the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC) login page in a
new tab or window.
6Click Login.
Chapter 24 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
194
24.3 Navigating the Web Configurator
The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Dashboard screen. This guide
uses the NWA1123-AC HD screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different models.
Figure 120 The Web Configurator’s Main Screen
The Web Configurator’s main screen is divided into these parts:
•A - Title Bar
•B - Navigation Panel
•C - Main Window
24.3.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides some useful links that always appear over the screens below, regardless of how
deep into the Web Configurator you navigate.
Figure 121 Title Bar
The icons provide the following functions.
A
C
B
Table 84 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Logout Click this to log out of the Web Configurator.
Help Click this to open the help page for the current screen.
About Click this to display basic information about the NWA1000 Series.
nebula Click this to open the NCC web site login page in a new tab or window.
Chapter 24 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
195
About
Click About to display basic information about the NWA1000 Series.
Figure 122 About
The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen.
24.3.2 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure NWA1000 Series features.
Click the arrow in the middle of the right edge of the navigation panel to hide the navigation panel
menus or drag it to resize them. The following sections introduce the NWA1000 Series’s navigation panel
menus and their screens.
Figure 123 Navigation Panel
Table 85 About
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Boot Module This shows the version number of the software that handles the booting process of the
NWA1000 Series.
Current Version This shows the firmware version of the NWA1000 Series.
Released Date This shows the date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh:mm:ss) when the firmware is released.
OK Click this to close the screen.
Chapter 24 The Web Configurator
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
196
Dashboard
The dashboard displays general device information, and AP information in widgets that you can re-
arrange to suit your needs.
For details on the Dashboard’s features, see Chapter 25 on page 197.
Configuration Menu
Use the configuration menu screens to configure the NWA1000 Series’s features.
24.3.3 Warning Messages
Warning messages, such as those resulting from misconfiguration, display in a pop up window.
Figure 124 Warning Message
Table 86 Configuration Menu Screens Summary
FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION
Network IP Setting Configure the IP address for the NWA1000 Series Ethernet interface.
VLAN Manage the Ethernet interface VLAN settings.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
197
CHAPTER 25
Dashboard
25.1 Overview
Use the Dashboard screens to check status information about the NWA1000 Series.
25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The main Dashboard screen (Section 25.2 on page 197) displays the NWA1000 Series’s general device
information, and client information.
25.2 Dashboard
This screen is the first thing you see when you log into the NWA1000 Series. It also appears every time you
click the Dashboard icon in the navigation panel. The Dashboard displays general AP information, and
client information in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. You can also collapse, refresh,
and close individual widgets.
Figure 125 Dashboard
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 87 Dashboard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
AP Information
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the NWA1000 Series.
Chapter 25 Dashboard
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
198
Serial Number This field displays the serial number of the NWA1000 Series.
Product Model This field displays the model name of the NWA1000 Series.
2.4G Channel
Information This field displays the channel number the NWA1000 Series is using and its output power in
the 2.4 GHz spectrum. This shows Not activated if the wireless LAN is disabled.
5G Channel
Information This field displays the channel number the NWA1000 Series is using and its output power in
the 5 GHz spectrum. This shows Not activated if the wireless LAN is disabled.
Ethernet This field displays whether the NWA1000 Series’s Ethernet port is connected and the IP
address of the gateway to which the NWA1000 Series is connected.
Internet This field displays whether the NWA1000 Series is connecting to the Internet.
Nebula
Connectivity
Status
This field displays whether the NWA1000 Series can connect to the Zyxel Nebula Control
Center (NCC).
Nebula Control
Center
Activation Status
This field displays whether the NWA1000 Series has been registered and can be managed
by the NCC.
Use Proxy to
Access Internet This displays whether the NAP uses a proxy server to access the NCC (Nebula Control
Center).
Table 87 Dashboard (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
199
CHAPTER 26
Network
26.1 Overview
This chapter describes how you can configure the management IP address and VLAN settings of your
NWA1000 Series.
The Internet Protocol (IP) address identifies a device on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network.
These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Figure 126 IP Setup
The figure above illustrates one possible setup of your NWA1000 Series. The gateway IP address is
192.168.1.1 and the managed IP address of the NWA1000 Series is 192.168.1.2 (default), but if the
NWA1000 Series is assigned an IP address by a DHCP server, the default (192.168.1.2) will not be used.
The gateway and the NWA1000 Series must belong in the same IP subnet to be able to communicate
with each other.
26.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The IP Setting screen (Section 26.2 on page 199) configures the NWA1000 Series’s LAN IP address.
• The VLAN screen (Section 26.3 on page 201) configures the NWA1000 Series’s VLAN settings.
26.2 IP Setting
Use this screen to configure the IP address for your NWA1000 Series. To access this screen, click
Configuration > Network > IP Setting.
Chapter 26 Network
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
200
Figure 127 Configuration > Network > IP Setting
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 88 Configuration > Network > IP Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Address
Assignment
Get
Automatically Select this to make the interface a DHCP client and automatically get the IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway address from a DHCP server.
Use Fixed IP
Address Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually.
IP Address Enter the IP address for this interface.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates
what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network.
Gateway Enter the IP address of the gateway. The NWA1000 Series sends packets to the gateway
when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be
on the same network as the interface.
DNS Server IP
Address Enter the IP address of the DNS server.
Use Proxy to Access
Internet
If the NWA1000 Series is behind a proxy server, you need to select this option and configure
the proxy server settings so that the NWA1000 Series can access the NCC through the proxy
server.
Proxy Server Enter the IP address of the proxy server.
Proxy Port Enter service port number used by the proxy server.
Authentication Select this option if the proxy server requires authentication before it grants access to the
Internet.
User Name Enter your proxy user name.
Password Enter your proxy password.
Chapter 26 Network
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
201
26.3 VLAN
This section discusses how to configure the NWA1000 Series’s VLAN settings.
Figure 128 Management VLAN Setup
In the figure above, to access and manage the NWA1000 Series from computer A, the NWA1000 Series
and switch B’s ports to which computer A and the NWA1000 Series are connected should be in the
same VLAN.
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable
logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and
every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN
membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority.
The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to
process the frame across the network.
Use this screen to configure the VLAN settings for your NWA1000 Series. To access this screen, click
Configuration > Network > VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
Table 88 Configuration > Network > IP Setting (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 26 Network
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
202
Figure 129 Configuration > Network > VLAN
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 89 Configuration > Network > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Settings
Management
VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID for the NWA1000 Series.
Untagged/
Tagged Set whether the NWA1000 Series adds the VLAN ID to outbound traffic transmitted through
its Ethernet port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA1000 Series.
Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
203
CHAPTER 27
Troubleshooting
27.1 Overview
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are
divided into the following categories.
•Power, Hardware Connections, and LED
•NWA1000 Series Access and Login
•Internet Access
•Wireless Connections
•Resetting the NWA1000 Series
27.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED
The NWA1000 Series does not turn on. The LED is not on.
1Make sure you are using the power adaptor included with the NWA1000 Series or a PoE power injector/
switch.
2Make sure the power adaptor or PoE power injector/switch is connected to the NWA1000 Series and
plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
3Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or PoE power injector/switch.
4Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
5If none of these steps work, you may have faulty hardware and should contact your NWA1000 Series
vendor.
The LED does not behave as expected.
1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 3.1 on page 19 or Section 3.1 on
page 19.
2Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide.
Chapter 27 Troubleshooting
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
204
3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
4Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or PoE power injector to the NWA1000 Series.
5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
27.3 NWA1000 Series Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the NWA1000 Series.
1The default IP address (in standalone mode) is 192.168.1.2.
2If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults.
See Section 27.6 on page 210.
3If your NWA1000 Series is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This
information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network. Find
this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information.
4If the NCC has managed the NWA1000 Series, you can also check the NCC's AP > Monitor > Access
Point screen for the NWA1000 Series's current LAN IP address.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address (in standalone mode) is 192.168.1.2.
• If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the NWA1000 Series.
• If the NCC has managed the NWA1000 Series, you can check the NCC's AP > Monitor > Access
Point screen for the NWA1000 Series's current LAN IP address.
2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick Start
Guide and Section 3.1 on page 19 or Section 3.1 on page 19.
3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled.
4Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NWA1000 Series. (If you know that there are
routers between your computer and the NWA1000 Series, skip this step.)
• If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address.
• If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer’s IP address is in the same
subnet as the NWA1000 Series.
Chapter 27 Troubleshooting
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
205
5Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NWA1000 Series with the default IP
address. See Section 27.6 on page 210.
6If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Try to access the NWA1000 Series using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the
NWA1000 Series, check the remote management settings to find out why the NWA1000 Series does
not respond to HTTP.
• If your computer is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port.
I forgot the password.
1The default password is 1234. If the NWA1000 Series is connected to the NCC and registered, check the
NCC for the password.
2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 27.6 on page 210.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NWA1000 Series.
1Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default password is 1234. This
fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the NWA1000 Series.
Log out of the NWA1000 Series in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
3Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or PoE power injector to the NWA1000 Series.
4If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 27.6 on page 210.
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new
firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
I cannot access the device directly anymore after switching to cloud mode.
Check the NWA1000 Series IP address and login credentials using the NCC and use them to access the
device. Note that the Web Configurator will have limited functionality when used in cloud mode.
Chapter 27 Troubleshooting
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
206
27.4 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
1Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick Start
Guide and Section 27.2 on page 203.
2Make sure the NWA1000 Series is connected to a broadband modem or router with Internet access and
your computer is set to obtain an dynamic IP address.
3If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings on the wireless client are
the same as the settings on the NWA1000 Series.
4Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again.
5If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NWA1000 Series), but
my Internet connection is not available anymore.
1Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick Start
Guide and Section 3.1 on page 19 or Section 3.1 on page 19.
2Reboot the NWA1000 Series.
3If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.
1There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LED, and check Section 3.1 on page 19 or
Section 3.1 on page 19. If the NWA1000 Series is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing
some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications.
2Check the signal strength. If the signal is weak, try moving the NWA1000 Series closer to the NWA1000
Series (if possible), and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the
wireless network (microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on).
3Reboot the NWA1000 Series.
4If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
Chapter 27 Troubleshooting
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
207
Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you
might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications.
27.5 Wireless Connections
I cannot access the NWA1000 Series or ping any computer from the WLAN.
1Make sure the wireless LAN (wireless radio) is enabled on the NWA1000 Series.
2Make sure the radio or at least one of the NWA1000 Series’s radios is operating in AP mode.
3Make sure the wireless adapter (installed on your computer) is working properly.
4Make sure the wireless adapter (installed on your computer) is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the
same wireless standard as the NWA1000 Series’s active radio.
5Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the
NWA1000 Series.
6Check that both the NWA1000 Series and your computer are using the same wireless and wireless
security settings.
Hackers have accessed my WEP-encrypted wireless LAN.
WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software.
It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security
mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. WPA2 or WPA2-PSK is recommended.
The wireless security is not following the re-authentication timer setting I specified.
If a RADIUS server authenticates wireless stations, the re-authentication timer on the RADIUS server has
priority. Change the RADIUS server’s configuration if you need to use a different re-authentication timer
setting.
I cannot get a certificate to import into the NWA1000 Series.
1For My Certificates, you can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that
was generated by the NWA1000 Series. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12 format, including
the certificate’s public and private keys.
Chapter 27 Troubleshooting
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
208
2You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import the certificate.
3Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:
• Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters, uppercase
letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.
• Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital signatures)
that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The private key is not
included. The NWA1000 Series currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single
certificate.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase letters,
uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form.
• Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates.The private key
in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The file’s password is not connected to
your certificate’s public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must
provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the NWA1000 Series.
Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this
to occur since many programs use text files by default.
I can only see newer logs. Older logs are missing.
When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages automatically overwrite
existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log message first.
The commands in my configuration file or shell script are not working properly.
• In a configuration file or shell script, use “#” or “!” as the first character of a command line to have the
NWA1000 Series treat the line as a comment.
• Your configuration files or shell scripts can use “exit” or a command line consisting of a single “!” to
have the NWA1000 Series exit sub command mode.
•Include write commands in your scripts. Otherwise the changes will be lost when the NWA1000 Series
restarts. You could use multiple write commands in a long script.
Note: “exit” or “!'” must follow sub commands if it is to make the NWA1000 Series exit sub
command mode.
I cannot get the firmware uploaded using the commands.
The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware. You only need to use the
command line interface if you need to recover the firmware. See the CLI Reference Guide for how to
determine if you need to recover the firmware and how to recover it.
Chapter 27 Troubleshooting
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
209
Wireless clients are not being load balanced among my APs.
• Make sure that all the APs used by the wireless clients in question share the same SSID, security, and
radio settings.
• Make sure that all the APs are in the same broadcast domain.
• Make sure that the wireless clients are in range of the other APs; if they are only in range of a single
AP, then load balancing may not be as effective.
In the Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List screen, there is no load balancing indicator
associated with any APs assigned to the load balancing task.
• Check to be sure that the AP profile which contains the load balancing settings is correctly assigned
to the APs in question.
• The load balancing task may have been terminated because further load balancing on the APs in
question is no longer required.
How do I remove the NWA1123-AC PRO indoor AP from its mounting bracket?
• Find the down arrow close to the Ethernet ports, then use a thin flat tool (for example, a flat screw
driver) to lift up a clip beneath 5GHz LED.
Chapter 27 Troubleshooting
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
210
• Turn the NWA1123-AC PRO indoor AP counter-clockwise to detach it from the mounting bracket.
27.6 Resetting the NWA1000 Series
If you cannot access the NWA1000 Series by any method, try restarting it by turning the power off and
then on again. If you still cannot access the NWA1000 Series by any method or you forget the
administrator password(s), you can reset the NWA1000 Series to its factory-default settings. Any
configuration files or shell scripts that you saved on the NWA1000 Series should still be available
afterwards.
Use the following procedure to reset the NWA1000 Series to its factory-default settings. This overwrites the
settings in the startup-config.conf file with the settings in the system-default.conf file.
Note: This procedure removes the current configuration.
1Make sure the Power LED is on and not blinking.
Chapter 27 Troubleshooting
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
211
2Press the RESET button and hold it until the Power LED begins to blink. (This usually takes about ten
seconds.)
3Release the RESET button, and wait for the NWA1000 Series to restart.
You should be able to access the NWA1000 Series using the default settings.
27.7 Getting More Troubleshooting Help
Search for support information for your model at www.zyxel.com for more troubleshooting suggestions.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
212
APPENDIX A
Importing Certificates
This appendix shows you how to import public key certificates into your web browser.
Public key certificates are used by web browsers to ensure that a secure web site is legitimate. When a
certificate authority such as VeriSign, Comodo, or Network Solutions, to name a few, receives a
certificate request from a website operator, they confirm that the web domain and contact information
in the request match those on public record with a domain name registrar. If they match, then the
certificate is issued to the website operator, who then places it on the site to be issued to all visiting web
browsers to let them know that the site is legitimate.
Many Zyxel products, such as the NWA1000 Series, issue their own public key certificates. These can be
used by web browsers on a LAN or WAN to verify that they are in fact connecting to the legitimate
device and not one masquerading as it. However, because the certificates were not issued by one of
the several organizations officially recognized by the most common web browsers, you will need to
import the Zyxel-created certificate into your web browser and flag that certificate as a trusted
authority.
Note: You can see if you are browsing on a secure website if the URL in your web browser’s
address bar begins with https:// or there is a sealed padlock icon ( ) somewhere
in the main browser window (not all browsers show the padlock in the same location).
Google Chrome
The following example uses Google Chrome on Windows 7. You first have to store the certificate in your
computer and then install it as a Trusted Root CA, as shown in the following tutorials.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
213
Export a Certificate
1If your device’s Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification, then the first time you browse to it, you
are presented with a certification error.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
214
2Click Advanced > Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe).
3In the Address Bar, click Not Secure > Certificate (Invalid).
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
215
4In the Certificate dialog box, click Details > Copy to File.
5In the Certificate Export Wizard, click Next.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
216
6Select the format and settings you want to use and then click Next.
7Type a filename and specify a folder to save the certificate in. Click Next.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
217
8In the Completing the Certificate Export Wizard screen, click Finish.
9Finally, click OK when presented with the successful certificate export message.
Import a Certificate
After storing the certificate in your computer, you need to import it in trusted root certification authorities
using the following steps:
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
218
1Open your browser, click the menu icon, and click Settings.
2Scroll down and click Advanced to expand the menu. Under Privacy and security, click Manage
certificates.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
219
3In the Certificates pop-up screen, click Trusted Root Certification Authorities. Click Import to start the
Certificate Import Wizard.
4Click Next, and then click Browse.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
220
5Select the certificate file you want to import and click Open.
6Click Next.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
221
7Confirm the settings displayed and click Finish.
8If presented with a security warning, click Yes.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
222
9Finally, click OK when you are notified of the successful import.
Install a Stand-Alone Certificate File
Rather than installing a public key certificate using browser settings, you can install a stand-alone
certificate file if one has been issued to you.
1Double-click the public key certificate file.
2Click Install Certificate.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
223
3Click Next on the first wizard screen, click Place all certificates in the following store, and click Browse.
4Select Trusted Root Certificate Authorities > OK, and then click Next.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
224
5Confirm the information shown on the final wizard screen and click Finish.
6If presented with a security warning, click Yes.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
225
7Finally, click OK when you are notified of the successful import.
Remove a Certificate in Google Chrome
This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Google Chrome on Windows 7.
1Open your browser, click the menu icon, and click Settings.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
226
2Scroll down and click Advanced to expand the menu. Under Privacy and security, click Manage
certificates.
3In the Certificates pop-up screen, click Trusted Root Certification Authorities.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
227
4Select the certificate you want to remove and click Remove.
5Click Yes when you see the following warning message.
6Confirm the details displayed in the warning message and click Yes.
Firefox
The following example uses Mozilla Firefox on Windows 7. You first have to store the certificate in your
computer and then install it as a Trusted Root CA, as shown in the following tutorials.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
228
Export a Certificate
1If your device’s Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification, then the first time you browse to it you are
presented with a certification error. Click Advanced.
2Click View Certificate.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
229
3Click Details > Export.
4Type a filename and click Save.
Import a Certificate
After storing the certificate in your computer, you need to import it in trusted root certification authorities
using the following steps:
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
230
1Open Firefox and click Tools > Options.
2In the Options page, click Privacy and Security, scroll to the bottom of the page, and then click View
Certificates.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
231
3In the Certificate Manager, click Authorities > Import.
4Use the Select File dialog box to locate the certificate and then click Open.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
232
5Select Trust this CA to identify websites and click OK.
Removing a Certificate in Firefox
This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Firefox.
1Open Firefox and click Tools > Options.
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
233
2In the Options page, click Privacy and Security, scroll to the bottom of the page, and then click View
Certificates.
3In the Certificate Manager, click Authorities and select the certificate you want to remove, Click Delete
or Distrust..
Appendix A Importing Certificates
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
234
4In the following dialog box, click OK.
5The next time you go to the web site that issued the public key certificate you just removed, a
certification error appears.
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
235
APPENDIX B
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in
IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an
example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be
written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6
prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the
network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a “private IP
address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-
local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as
follows.
Table 90 Link-local Unicast Address Format
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in IPv4. A
global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID
10 bits 54 bits 64 bits
Appendix B IPv6
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
236
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have
its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to “127.0.0.1”
in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is
not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a
multicast group.
Table 91 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local connected link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local connected link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local site.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 All DHCP severs on a local site.
Table 92 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Appendix B IPv6
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
237
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into
eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character
(1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example,
FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet
port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should
have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-byte)
Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes
of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the
following example.
Stateless Autoconfiguration
With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated.
Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful
autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses don’t need to be maintained by a DHCP server.
Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated
on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own Ethernet MAC
address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address.
When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address (beginning
with fe80).
When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the NWA1000 Series is set to
automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 1another
address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router.
This is a routable global IP address.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol that
allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other configuration
information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP.
Table 93
MAC 00 : 13 : 49 : 12 : 34 : 56
Table 94
EUI-64 02: 13 : 49 : FF : FE : 12 : 34 : 56
1. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses.
Appendix B IPv6
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
238
Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for identification
when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC address, time,
vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with the IANA. It should not
change over time even after you reboot the device.
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the
server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with exactly
one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP
server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity
association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses.
An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1
and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any
addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which
the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If the time T2 is reached and the server
does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the
client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's discretion.
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between
the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-known multicast
address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to
a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option
to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, such as the
system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the
DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay
agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-
Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should
not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or
a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The NWA1000 Series uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example,
2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements (RAs) regularly by
multicast, the NWA1000 Series passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use
the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
T1
T2
Renew Rebind
Rebind
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
to S2
to S2
Appendix B IPv6
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
239
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has
a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4.
ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet
processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track
neighbor’s reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:
• Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbor’s link-layer address (MAC
address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being “reachable” means it
responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement message.
• Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address.
• Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and
forward packets.
• Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from
a router to advertise its presence and other parameters.
IPv6 Cache
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router list.
The NWA1000 Series maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from
response messages. In IPv6, the NWA1000 Series configures a link-local address automatically, and then
sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be
resolved or verified, the NWA1000 Series also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the
NWA1000 Series receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address
in the neighbor cache. When the NWA1000 Series uses a router solicitation message to query for a router
and receives a router advertisement message, it adds the router’s information to the neighbor cache,
prefix list and destination cache. The NWA1000 Series creates an entry in the default router list cache if
the router can be used as a default router.
When the NWA1000 Series needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine
the next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the NWA1000 Series uses the prefix
list to determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing
through a router. If the address is onlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the
NWA1000 Series determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop
IP address is known, the NWA1000 Series looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and
sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the NWA1000 Series cannot find an entry in the
neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process.
This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
Multicast Listener Discovery
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's Internet
Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP
message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
Appendix B IPv6
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
240
MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message
for that address.
An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a
multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then sends a
group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices
connected to this port should remain in the group.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista
By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6
install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the ipconfig
command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your
automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the
interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP
Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have
to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses
or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.46
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.254
Appendix B IPv6
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
241
1Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
2After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client Install as service.
3Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
4Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client.
5Click Start and then OK.
6Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7
Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
Appendix B IPv6
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
242
1Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.
2Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.
3Click OK to save the change.
4Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.
5Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
6Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address
(2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IPv6 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 2001:b021:2d::1000
Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 172.16.100.61
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
243
APPENDIX C
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If
you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a Zyxel office for the region in which you bought the
device.
See https://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also
https://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information.
Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
Taiwan
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com
Asia
China
• Zyxel Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
Zyxel Communications (Beijing) Corp.
Zyxel Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
• https://www.zyxel.com/cn/zh/
India
•Zyxel Technology India Pvt Ltd
• https://www.zyxel.com/in/en/
Kazakhstan
•Zyxel Kazakhstan
• https://www.zyxel.kz
Appendix C Customer Support
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
244
Korea
• Zyxel Korea Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.kr
Malaysia
• Zyxel Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.my
Pakistan
• Zyxel Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.pk
Philippines
• Zyxel Philippines
• http://www.zyxel.com.ph
Singapore
• Zyxel Singapore Pte Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Taiwan
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/
Thailand
• Zyxel Thailand Co., Ltd
• https://www.zyxel.com/th/th/
Vietnam
• Zyxel Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
• https://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi
Europe
Belarus
•Zyxel BY
• https://www.zyxel.by
Belgium
• Zyxel Communications B.V.
• https://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/
Appendix C Customer Support
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
245
• https://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/
Bulgaria
•Zyxel България
• https://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Czech Republic
• Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o
• https://www.zyxel.com/cz/cs/
Denmark
• Zyxel Communications A/S
• https://www.zyxel.com/dk/da/
Estonia
• Zyxel Estonia
• https://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/
Finland
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/fi/fi/
France
•Zyxel France
• https://www.zyxel.fr
Germany
•Zyxel Deutschland GmbH
• https://www.zyxel.com/de/de/
Hungary
• Zyxel Hungary & SEE
• https://www.zyxel.com/hu/hu/
Italy
• Zyxel Communications Italy
• https://www.zyxel.com/it/it/
Latvia
•Zyxel Latvia
• https://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/
Appendix C Customer Support
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
246
Lithuania
•Zyxel Lithuania
• https://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/
Netherlands
• Zyxel Benelux
• https://www.zyxel.com/nl/nl/
Norway
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/no/no/
Poland
• Zyxel Communications Poland
• https://www.zyxel.com/pl/pl/
Romania
• Zyxel Romania
• https://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro
Russia
• Zyxel Russia
• https://www.zyxel.com/ru/ru/
Slovakia
• Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
• https://www.zyxel.com/sk/sk/
Spain
• Zyxel Communications ES Ltd
• https://www.zyxel.com/es/es/
Sweden
• Zyxel Communications
• https://www.zyxel.com/se/sv/
Switzerland
•Studerus AG
• https://www.zyxel.ch/de
• https://www.zyxel.ch/fr
Appendix C Customer Support
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
247
Turkey
• Zyxel Turkey A.S.
• https://www.zyxel.com/tr/tr/
UK
• Zyxel Communications UK Ltd.
• https://www.zyxel.com/uk/en/
Ukraine
•Zyxel Ukraine
• http://www.ua.zyxel.com
South America
Argentina
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Brazil
• Zyxel Communications Brasil Ltda.
• https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/
Colombia
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Ecuador
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
South America
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/
Middle East
Israel
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• http://il.zyxel.com/
Appendix C Customer Support
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
248
Middle East
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/me/en/
North America
USA
• Zyxel Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters
• https://www.zyxel.com/us/en/
Oceania
Australia
• Zyxel Communications Corporation
• https://www.zyxel.com/au/en/
Africa
South Africa
• Nology (Pty) Ltd.
• https://www.zyxel.com/za/en/
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
249
APPENDIX D
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2019 by Zyxel Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any
language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of Zyxel Communications Corporation.
Published by Zyxel Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimers
Zyxel does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any
license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. Zyxel further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein
without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Your use of the NWA1000 Series is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers.
Trademarks
Trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Regulatory Notice and Statement
UNITED STATES of AMERICA
The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.
FCC EMC Statement
• This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
device.
• This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the device off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
• Increase the separation between the devices
• Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receiver’s
• Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This device complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
• This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
• Country Code selection feature to be disabled for products marketed to the US/CANADA.
• Operation of this device is restricted to indoor use only.
BRAZIL
The following applies if you use the product within Brazil.
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito a proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo
tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Appendix D Legal Information
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
250
CANADA
The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area.
Industry Canada ICES Statement
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
Industry Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 Statement
• This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• This radio transmitter (2468C-NWA5123AC (NWA1123-AC v2), 2468C-NWA5123ACHD (NWA1123-AC HD), 2468C-WAC5302DS (NWA1302-AC))
has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required
antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain
indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Antenna Information
If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz, the following attention must be paid,
• The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel
mobile satellite systems.
• For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the
equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and
• The worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.2(3) of RSS 247
shall be clearly indicated.
If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz, the following attention must be paid.
• For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz
shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit.
• Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
• Le présent émetteur radio (2468C-NWA5123AC (NWA1123-AC v2), 2468C-NWA5123ACHD (NWA1123-AC HD), 2468C-WAC5302DS
(NWA1302-AC)) de modèle s'il fait partie du matériel de catégorieI) a été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types
d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types
d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de
l'émetteur.
ANTENNA MODEL NO. TYPE CONNECTOR 2.4 G GAIN 5G GAIN REMARK
NWA1123-ACv2 1 PIFA UFL 3.08
NWA1123-ACv2 2 PIFA UFL 3.07
NWA1123-ACv2 3 PIFA UFL 4.06 (5150~5250 MHz)
3.79 (5725~5850 MHz)
NWA1123-ACv2 4 PIFA UFL 3.99 (5150~5250 MHz)
3.78 (5725~5850 MHz)
NWA1123-AC HD 1 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)
NWA1123-AC HD 2 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)
NWA1123-AC HD 3 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)
4 (5725-5850 MHz)
NWA1123-AC HD 4 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)
4 (5725-5850 MHz)
NWA1123-AC HD 5 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)
4 (5725-5850 MHz)
NWA1302-AC 1 Loop I-PEX 5.82 (2400-2483.5 MHz)
2 Loop I-PEX 5.02 (2400-2483.5 MHz)
3 PIFA I-PEX 5 (5150-5250 MHz)
5 (5250-5350 MHz)
5 (5470-5725 MHz)
5 (5725-5850 MHz)
Appendix D Legal Information
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
251
Informations Antenne
Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz est activée pour ce produit, il est nécessaire de porter une
attention particulière aux choses suivantes
• Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont réservés uniquement pour une utilisation à l’intérieur afin de réduire les risques
de brouillage préjudiciable aux systèmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mêmes canaux;
• Pour les dispositifs munis d’antennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande de 5 725 à 5 850 MHz)
doit être conforme à la limite de la p.i.r.e. spécifiée pour l'exploitation point à point et l’exploitation non point à point, selon le cas;
• Les pires angles d’inclinaison nécessaires pour rester conforme à l’exigence de la p.i.r.e. applicable au masque d’élévation, et énoncée à la
section 6.2.2 3) du CNR-247, doivent être clairement indiqués.
Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz est activée pour ce produit, il est nécessaire de porter une
attention particulière aux choses suivantes.
• Pour les dispositifs munis d’antennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes de 5 250 à 5 350 MHz
et de 5 470 à 5 725 MHz doit être conforme à la limite de la p.i.r.e.
Industry Canada radiation exposure statement
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and
operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and
operated with a minimum distance of 22cm (NWA1123-AC HD) between the radiator and your body.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations:
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé.Cet équipement doit
être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé.Cet équipement doit
être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 22 cm (NWA1123-AC HD) de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
Caution:
(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel
mobile satellite systems;
(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and
(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point
and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-
5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
Avertissement:
(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont réservés uniquement pour une utilisation à l’intérieur afin de réduire les risques
de brouillage préjudiciable aux systèmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mêmes canaux;
(ii) le gain maximal d’antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer à la limite de
p.i.r.e.;
(iii) le gain maximal d’antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5725-5825 MHz) doit se conformer à la limite de p.i.r.e. spécifiée pour
l’exploitation point à point et non point à point, selon le cas.
MODÈLE D'ANTENNE NB. TYPE CONNECTEUR 2.4 G GAIN 5G GAIN REMARQUE
NWA1123-ACv2 1 PIFA UFL 3.08
NWA1123-ACv2 2 PIFA UFL 3.07
NWA1123-ACv2 3 PIFA UFL 4.06 (5150~5250 MHz)
3.79 (5725~5850 MHz)
NWA1123-ACv2 4 PIFA UFL 3.99 (5150~5250 MHz)
3.78 (5725~5850 MHz)
NWA1123-AC HD 1 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)
NWA1123-AC HD 2 PIFA I-PEX 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz)
NWA1123-AC HD 3 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)
4 (5725-5850 MHz)
NWA1123-AC HD 4 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)
4 (5725-5850 MHz)
NWA1123-AC HD 5 Monopole I-PEX 4 (5150-5250 MHz)
4 (5725-5850 MHz)
NWA1302-AC 1 Loop I-PEX 5.82 (2400-2483.5 MHz)
2 Loop I-PEX 5.02 (2400-2483.5 MHz)
3 PIFA I-PEX 5 (5150-5250 MHz)
5 (5250-5350 MHz)
5 (5470-5725 MHz)
5 (5725-5850 MHz)
Appendix D Legal Information
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
252
(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi être avisés que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont désignés utilisateurs principaux (c.-à-
d., qu’ils ont la priorité) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des
dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.
EUROPEA N UNION
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.
Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 2014/53/EU (Radio Equipment Directive, RED)
• Compliance information for 2.4GHz and/or 5GHz wireless products relevant to the EU and other Countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/
EU (RED). And this product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/EU) without any limitation
except for the countries mentioned below table:
• In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 5GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area
networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements or both are
applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. Zyxel recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of
their national regulations for the 5GHz wireless LANs.
• If this device for operation in the band 5150-5350 MHz, it is for indoor use only.
NWA1123-ACv2
• This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radio equipment and your body.
• The maximum RF power operating for each band as follows:
• The band 2,400 to 2,483.5 MHz is 97.95 mW,
• The bands 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 199.07 mW,
• The 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 743.02 mW.
NWA1123-AC HD
• This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radio equipment and your body.
• The maximum RF power operating for each band as follows:
• The band 2,400 to 2,483.5 MHz is 97.274 mW,
• The bands 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 198.61 mW,
• The 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 995.40 mW.
NWA1123-AC PRO
• This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radio equipment and your body.
• The maximum RF power operating for each band as follows:
• The band 2,400 to 2,483.5 MHz is 92.68 mW,
• The bands 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 192.75 mW,
• The 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 966.05 mW.
NWA1302-AC
• This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radio equipment and your body.
• The maximum RF power operating for each band as follows:
• The band 2,400 to 2,483.5 MHz is 93.33 mW,
• The bands 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 192.31 mW,
• The 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 391.74 mW.
Български
(Bulgarian)
С настоящото Zyxel декларира, че това оборудване е в съответствие със съществените изисквания и другите
приложими разпоредбите на Директива 2014/53/ЕC.
National Restrictions
• The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link
having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details.
• Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te
worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer
gegevens.
• Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extérieur d’une distance supérieure à 300 mètres doivent être notifiées à
l’Institut Belge des services Postaux et des Télécommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples
détails.
Español
(Spanish)
Por medio de la presente Zyxel declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 2014/53/UE..
Čeština
(Czech)
Zyxel tímto prohlašuje, že tento zařízení je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice
2014/53/EU.
Appendix D Legal Information
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
253
Notes:
1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 2014/53/EU has also been implemented in those
countries.
Dansk (Danish) Undertegnede Zyxel erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr udstyr overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i
direktiv 2014/53/EU.
National Restrictions
• In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage.
• I Danmark må frekvensbåndet 5150 - 5350 også anvendes udendørs.
Deutsch
(German)
Hiermit erklärt Zyxel, dass sich das Gerät Ausstattung in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den
übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU befindet.
Eesti keel
(Estonian)
Käesolevaga kinnitab Zyxel seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 2014/53/EU põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist
tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
Ελληνικά
(Greek)
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Zyxel ∆ΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ εξοπλισμός ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩ∆ΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ
∆ΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ Ο∆ΗΓΙΑΣ 2014/53/EU.
English Hereby, Zyxel declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 2014/53/EU.
Français
(French)
Par la présente Zyxel déclare que l'appareil équipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions
pertinentes de la directive 2014/53/EU.
Hrvatski
(Croatian)
Zyxel ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/EU.
Íslenska
(Icelandic)
Hér með lýsir, Zyxel því yfir að þessi búnaður er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og önnur viðeigandi ákvæði tilskipunar 2014/53/
EU.
Italiano (Italian) Con la presente Zyxel dichiara che questo attrezzatura è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti
stabilite dalla direttiva 2014/53/EU.
National Restrictions
• This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation
Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires
a “general authorization.” Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details.
• Questo prodotto è conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione
delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede
una “Autorizzazione Generale”. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli.
Latviešu valoda
(Latvian)
Ar šo Zyxel deklarē, ka iekārtas atbilst Direktīvas 2014/53/EU būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
National Restrictions
• The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please
check http://www.esd.lv for more details.
• 2.4 GHz frekvenèu joslas izmantoðanai ârpus telpâm nepiecieðama atïauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairâk
informâcijas: http://www.esd.lv.
Lietuvių kalba
(Lithuanian)
Šiuo Zyxel deklaruoja, kad šis įranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 2014/53/EU Direktyvos nuostatas.
Magyar
(Hungarian)
Alulírott, Zyxel nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezés megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 2014/53/EU
irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Malti (Maltese) Hawnhekk, Zyxel, jiddikjara li dan tagħmir jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti li hemm
fid-Dirrettiva 2014/53/EU.
Nederlands
(Dutch)
Hierbij verklaart Zyxel dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante
bepalingen van richtlijn 2014/53/EU.
Polski (Polish) Niniejszym Zyxel oświadcza, że sprzęt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami
Dyrektywy 2014/53/EU.
Português
(Portuguese)
Zyxel declara que este equipamento está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 2014/
53/EU.
Română
(Romanian)
Prin prezenta, Zyxel declară că acest echipament este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi alte prevederi relevante ale
Directivei 2014/53/EU.
Slovenčina
(Slovak)
Zyxel týmto vyhlasuje, že zariadenia spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 2014/53/EU.
Slovenščina
(Slovene)
Zyxel izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 2014/53/EU.
Suomi (Finnish) Zyxel vakuuttaa täten että laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 2014/53/EU oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien
direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska
(Swedish)
Härmed intygar Zyxel att denna utrustning står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta
bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 2014/53/EU.
Norsk
(Norwegian)
Erklærer herved Zyxel at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I
direktiv 2014/53/EU.
Appendix D Legal Information
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
254
2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the
gain of the antenna used (specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm).
List of national codes
Safety Warnings
• Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do not store things on the device.
• Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device. For example, do not place the device in an
enclosed space such as a box or on a very soft surface such as a bed or sofa.
• Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified
service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to
a power outlet.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor
or cord.
• Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V
AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it from the
device and the power source, repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose them at
the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic devices. For detailed information about recycling of this
product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
• The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power
supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,
• For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;
• For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible.
Environment statement
ErP (Energy-related Products)
Zyxel products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published
Directive 2009/125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called
as "ErP Directive (Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures, power
consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:
Network standby power consumption < 8W, and/or
Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or
Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W.
For wireless setting, please refer to Chapter 10 on page 78 chapter for more detail.
COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria AT Liechtenstein LI
Belgium BE Lithuania LT
Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU
Croatia HR Malta MT
Cyprus CY Netherlands NL
Czech Republic CR Norway NO
Denmark DK Poland PL
Estonia EE Portugal PT
Finland FI Romania RO
France FR Serbia RS
Germany DE Slovakia SK
Greece GR Slovenia SI
Hungary HU Spain ES
Iceland IS Sweden SE
Ireland IE Switzerland CH
Italy IT Turkey TR
Latvia LV United Kingdom GB
Appendix D Legal Information
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
255
European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information
The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic
waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of
your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development.
Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll entsorgt
werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der
Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt
und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.
El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la
doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el
producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y
medioambiental.
Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des ordures
ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte séparée
de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l'environnement et la santé humaine.
Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici.
Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta
separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente e la salute umana.
Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här produkten når
slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och mänsklig hälsa genom att
göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.
台灣
以下訊息僅適用於產品銷售至台灣地區
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司，商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。 低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
無線資訊傳輸設備避免影響附近雷達系統之操作。
電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2，送測產品 (NWA1123-ACv2) 實測值為：0.316 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm
電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2，送測產品 (NWA1123-AC PRO) 實測值為：0.448 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm
電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2，送測產品 (NWA1123-AC HD) 實測值為：0.685 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm
電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 1mW/cm2，送測產品 (NWA1302-AC) 實測值為：0.109 mW/cm2 本產品使用時建議應距離人體 20 cm
無線資訊傳輸設備忍受合法通信之干擾且不得干擾合法通信；如造成干擾，應立即停用，俟無干擾之虞，始得繼續使用。
無線資訊傳輸設備的製造廠商應確保頻率穩定性，如依製造廠商使用手冊上所述正常操作，發射的信號應維持於操作頻帶中。
無線資訊傳輸設備必須具備安全功能，以保護未經授權之一方任意更改軟體進而避免發射機操作於非經認證之頻率、輸出功率、調變形式或其他射頻參數設
定。
使用無線產品時，應避免影響附近雷達系統之操作。
若使用高增益指向性天線，該產品僅應用於固定式點對點系統。
安全警告
為了您的安全，請先閱讀以下警告及指示 :
• 請勿將此產品接近水、火焰或放置在高溫的環境。
• 避免設備接觸任何液體 - 切勿讓設備接觸水、雨水、高濕度、污水腐蝕性的液體或其他水份。
• 灰塵及污物 - 切勿接觸灰塵、污物、沙土、食物或其他不合適的材料。
Appendix D Legal Information
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
256
• 雷雨天氣時，不要安裝，使用或維修此設備。有遭受電擊的風險。
• 切勿重摔或撞擊設備，並勿使用不正確的電源變壓器。
• 若接上不正確的電源變壓器會有爆炸的風險。
• 請勿隨意更換產品內的電池。
• 如果更換不正確之電池型式，會有爆炸的風險，請依製造商說明書處理使用過之電池。
• 請將廢電池丟棄在適當的電器或電子設備回收處。
• 請勿將設備解體。
• 請勿阻礙設備的散熱孔，空氣對流不足將會造成設備損害。
• 請插在正確的電壓供給插座 ( 如 : 北美 / 台灣電壓 110V AC，歐洲是 230V AC)。
• 假若電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線損壞，請從插座拔除，若您還繼續插電使用，會有觸電死亡的風險。
• 請勿試圖修理電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線，若有毀損，請直接聯絡您購買的店家，購買一個新的電源變壓器。
• 請勿將此設備安裝於室外，此設備僅適合放置於室內。
• 請勿隨一般垃圾丟棄。
• 請參閱產品背貼上的設備額定功率。
• 請參考產品型錄或是彩盒上的作業溫度。
• 產品沒有斷電裝置或者採用電源線的插頭視為斷電裝置的一部分，以下警語將適用 :
－ 對永久連接之設備， 在設備外部須安裝可觸及之斷電裝置；
－ 對插接式之設備， 插座必須接近安裝之地點而且是易於觸及的。
About the Symbols
Various symbols are used in this product to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage.
The meaning of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the
contents.
Explanation of the Symbols
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.
Zyxel Limited Warranty
Zyxel warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the
Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized Zyxel local
distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product
have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Zyxel will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or
components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to
proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value,
and will be solely at the discretion of Zyxel. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by
an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties,
express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. Zyxel shall in no event be held
liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the
device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com.
SYMBOL EXPLANATION
Alternating current (AC):
AC is an electric current in which the flow of electric charge periodically reverses direction.
Direct current (DC):
DC if the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers.
Earth; ground:
A wiring terminal intended for connection of a Protective Earthing Conductor.
Class II equipment:
The method of protection against electric shock in the case of class II equipment is either double insulation or
reinforced insulation.
Appendix D Legal Information
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
257
Open Source Licenses
This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided
with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. If you cannot find it there, contact your vendor or Zyxel
Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw.
To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact your vendor or Zyxel Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw.
Index
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
258
Index
Symbols
A
access 34, 193
access privileges 13
access users 91
see also users 91
admin users 91
multiple logins 96
see also users 91
alerts 160, 164, 165, 167, 168, 169
antenna switch 186
AP 12
applications
MBSSID 13
Repeater 18
B
backing up configuration files 172
Basic Service Set
see BSS
boot module 177
BSS 13
C
CA
and certificates 120
CA (Certificate Authority), see certificates
CEF (Common Event Format) 162, 167
Certificate Authority (CA)
see certificates
Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) 125
Certificate Revocation List (CRL) 120
vs OCSP 134
certificates 119
advantages of 120
and CA 120
and FTP 153
and HTTPS 141
and SSH 151
and WWW 142
certification path 120, 127, 132
expired 120
factory-default 120
file formats 120
fingerprints 128, 133
importing 123
not used for encryption 120
revoked 120
self-signed 120, 124
serial number 127, 132
storage space 122, 130
thumbprint algorithms 121
thumbprints 121
used for authentication 120
verifying fingerprints 121
certification requests 124, 125
certifications
viewing 256
channel 14
CLI 31, 40
button 40
messages 40
popup window 40
Reference Guide 2
cold start 32
commands 31
sent by Web Configurator 40
Common Event Format (CEF) 162, 167
comparison table 12
configuration 13
information 181
configuration files 170
Index
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
259
at restart 172
backing up 172
downloading 173
downloading with FTP 153
editing 170
how applied 171
lastgood.conf 172, 174
managing 171
startup-config.conf 174
startup-config-bad.conf 172
syntax 170
system-default.conf 174
uploading 175
uploading with FTP 153
use without restart 170
contact information 243
cookies 34, 193
copyright 249
CPU usage 53, 55
current date/time 54, 136
daylight savings 138
setting manually 139
time server 140
customer support 243
D
date 136
daylight savings 138
DCS 79
DHCP 136
and domain name 136
diagnostics 181
disclaimer 249
domain name 136
dual radios 14
dual-radio application 15
dynamic channel selection 79
E
e-mail
daily statistics report 158
encryption 18
ESSID 207
Extended Service Set IDentification 98
F
FCC interference statement 249
file extensions
configuration files 170
shell scripts 170
file manager 170
Firefox 34, 193
firmware
and restart 176
boot module, see boot module
current version 53, 177
getting updated 176
uploading 176, 177
uploading with FTP 153
flash usage 53
FTP 32, 153
and certificates 153
with Transport Layer Security (TLS) 153
G
Guide
CLI Reference 2
H
HTTP
over SSL, see HTTPS
redirect to HTTPS 142
vs HTTPS 141
HTTPS 141
and certificates 141
authenticating clients 141
avoiding warning messages 144
example 142
vs HTTP 141
with Internet Explorer 143
with Netscape Navigator 143
Index
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
260
HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer,
see HTTPS
I
IEEE 802.1x 99
installation 13
interface
status 54
interfaces
as DHCP servers 136
interference 14
Internet Explorer 34, 193
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
IP Address 72, 199
gateway IP address 72, 199
IP subnet 72, 199
IPv6 235
addressing 235
EUI-64 237
global address 235
interface ID 237
link-local address 235
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 235
ping 235
prefix 235
prefix length 235
stateless autoconfiguration 237
unspecified address 236
J
Java
permissions 34, 193
JavaScripts 34, 193
K
key pairs 119
L
lastgood.conf 172, 174
layer-2 isolation 114
example 114
MAC 115
LED suppression 183
LEDs 19, 24
Blinking 20, 23, 25, 28
Flashing 20, 21, 23, 25, 28
load balancing 79
Locator LED 184
log messages
categories 165, 167, 168, 169
debugging 69
regular 69
types of 69
logout
Web Configurator 37, 194
logs
e-mail profiles 160
e-mailing log messages 71, 164
formats 162
log consolidation 165
settings 160
syslog servers 160
system 160
types of 160
M
MAC address
range 53
maintenance 13
management 13
Management Information Base (MIB) 154, 155
management mode 16
managing the device
good habits 32, 192
using FTP. See FTP.
MBSSID 13
memory usage 53, 56
message bar 43, 196
messages
CLI 40
Index
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
261
warning 43, 196
mode 12
model name 53
My Certificates, see also certificates 122
N
Netscape Navigator 34, 193
network access control 13
Network Time Protocol (NTP) 139
O
objects
certificates 119
users, account
user 91
Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) 134
vs CRL 134
operating mode 12
overview 12, 31, 191
P
pop-up windows 34, 193
power off 33
power on 32
product registration 256
Public-Key Infrastructure (PKI) 120
public-private key pairs 119
R
radio 14
reboot 32, 188
vs reset 188
Reference Guide, CLI 2
registration
product 256
remote management
FTP, see FTP
Telnet 152
WWW, see WWW
reports
daily 158
daily e-mail 158
reset 210
vs reboot 188
vs shutdown 189
RESET button 32, 210
restart 188
RF interference 14
RFC
2510 (Certificate Management Protocol or
CMP) 125
Rivest, Shamir and Adleman public-key algorithm
(RSA) 124
root AP 12
RSA 124, 132, 133
RSSI threshold 104
S
SCEP (Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol) 125
screen resolution 34, 193
Secure SHell 148
Secure Socket Layer, see SSL
serial number 53
service control
and users 140
limitations 140
timeouts 140
Service Set 98
Service Set Identifier
see SSID
shell scripts 170
downloading 179
editing 178
how applied 171
managing 178
syntax 170
uploading 180
shutdown 33, 189
vs reset 189
Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) 125
Index
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
262
Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
SNMP 154
agents 154
Get 154
GetNext 154
Manager 154
managers 154
MIB 154, 155
network components 154
Set 154
Trap 155
traps 155
versions 154
SSH 148
and certificates 151
client requirements 150
encryption methods 150
for secure Telnet 151
how connection is established 149
versions 150
with Linux 151
with Microsoft Windows 151
SSID 13
SSID profile
pre-configured 13
SSID profiles 13
SSL 141
starting the device 32
startup-config.conf 174
if errors 172
missing at restart 172
present at restart 172
startup-config-bad.conf 172
station 79
statistics
daily e-mail report 158
status 52, 197
status bar 43, 196
warning message popup 43, 196
stopping the device 32
supported browsers 34, 193
syslog 162, 167
syslog servers, see also logs
system log, see logs
system name 53, 136
system uptime 54
system-default.conf 174
T
Telnet 152
with SSH 151
time 136
time servers (default) 139
trademarks 249
Transport Layer Security (TLS) 153
troubleshooting 181
Trusted Certificates, see also certificates 129
U
upgrading
firmware 176
uploading
configuration files 175
firmware 176
shell scripts 178
usage
CPU 53, 55
flash 53
memory 53, 56
onboard flash 53
use 13
user authentication 91
user name
rules 92
user objects 91
users 91
access, see also access users
admin (type) 91
admin, see also admin users
and service control 140
currently logged in 54
default lease time 95, 97
default reauthentication time 95, 97
lease time 94
limited-admin (type) 91
lockout 96
reauthentication time 94
types of 91
Index
NWA1000 Series User’s Guide
263
user (type) 91
user names 92
V
Vantage Report (VRPT) 162, 167
Virtual Local Area Network 75, 201
VLAN 75, 201
introduction 75, 201
VRPT (Vantage Report) 162, 167
W
warm start 32
warning message popup 43, 196
warranty 256
note 256
WDS 12, 18
Web Configurator 31, 34, 192, 193
access 34, 193
requirements 34, 193
supported browsers 34, 193
web configurator 13
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 99
wireless channel 207
wireless client 79
Wireless Distribution System (WDS) 18
wireless LAN 207
Wireless network
overview 78
wireless network
example 78
wireless profile 98
layer-2 isolation 98
MAC filtering 98
radio 98
security 98
SSID 98
wireless repeater 12
wireless security 13, 207
wireless station 79
Wizard Setup 46
WLAN interface 14
WPA2 99
WWW 141
and certificates 142
see also HTTP, HTTPS 141